manualshive.com logo in svg

Canon IR5000 - iR B/W Laser, Руководство по обслуживанию

Принтер Canon IR5000 - iR B/W Laser - это надежное устройство для офиса. У нас на сайте вы можете бесплатно скачать руководство пользователя и драйверы для установки. Посетите manualshive.com уже сейчас, чтобы получить всю необходимую информацию для работы с этим принтером.

Поделиться
Скачать
background image

COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 

2000 2000 2000 2000

 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000

CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS

4-40 T

Right upper cover, Right lower cover

4) Are the right upper cover and the right lower cover closed fully?

NO:

Close the covers. If there is a gap, correct it.

Pressure spring

5) Are the springs of the right upper cover and the right lower cover

exerting pressure on the vertical path rollers 1, 2, 3, and 4?

NO:

Check the pressure springs.

Pre-registration motor (M17), vertical path duplex/feeding motor (M25), Vertical path upper
motor (M26), Vertical path lower motor (M27)

6) Open the right upper cover and the right lower cover, and put pa-

per over the cover open/closed sensor assembly; then, turn on
(MTR-ON) the motor in question in service mode
(COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK>MTR). Does the vertical path
rollers 1, 2, 3, and 4 or the pre-registration roller rotate?

Motor

Code

Pre-registration motor

22

Vertical duplex/ feeding motor

15

Vertical path upper motor

17

Vertical path lower motor

16

NO:

Check the wiring and the motor driver PCB; if normal, replace the
motor.

Registration roller clutch

7) Is the leading edge of paper as far as the registration roller assem-

bly?

YES: See “The registration roller fails to rotate.”

Pickup assembly

8) Open the right upper cover and the right lower cover, and put pa-

per over the door switch. When the Start key is pressed, does the
feeding/separation roller rotate to move paper normally?

NO:

Check the pickup assembly by referring to 5. “Troubleshooting
Feeding Faults.”

Right deck pickup motor (M11), Left deck pickup motor (M24), Cassette 3/4 pickup motor
(M12), DC controller PCB

9) Set the meter range to 30 VDC, and connect the meter probes to the

connectors on the DC controller PCB of the motor in question as
indicated. Does the voltage change from 24 to 0 V when the Start
key is pressed?

Motor

+

-

Right deck pickup motor

J104-A5, A6

GND

Left deck pickup motor

J104-B4, B3

GND

Cassette 3/4 pickup motor

J104-A11, A12

GND

YES: Check the wiring and the motor driver PCB; if normal, replace the

motor.

NO:

Replace the DC controller PCB.

Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com

Содержание IR5000 - iR B/W Laser

Страница 1: ...FY8 13GS 000 JULY 2000 iR5000 iR6000 REVISION 0 COPYRIGHT 2000 CANON INC CANON iR5000 iR6000 REV 0 JULY 2000 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 2: ... or short period Canon will issue a new edition of this manual The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are inconsistent with local law Trademarks The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks of the individual companies Copyright This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved Under the copyright laws this manual may...

Страница 3: ...void electric shocks or problems Indicates an item requiring disconnection of the power plug from the electric outlet Indicates an item intended to provide notes assisting the understanding of the topic in question Memo Indicates an item of reference assisting the understanding of the topic in ques tion REF Provides a description of a service mode Provides a description of the nature of an error i...

Страница 4: ...ocation of the machine installation of ac cessories 2 Reader Unit Chapter 1 Basic Operation functional construction outline of electrical circuitry basic sequence of operations Chapter 2 Original Exposure System principles of operation of the exposure sys tem timing of operation disassembly assem bly and adjustment Chapter 3 Image Processing System principles of operation of the image process ing ...

Страница 5: ...duled servicing chart Chapter 2 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure basic procedure for image adjustment Chapter 3 Standards and Adjustments standards and adjustments Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Image Faults Malfunctions troubleshooting image faults malfunctions Chapter 5 Service Mode how to use service mode list of service modes Chapter 6 Self Diagnosis codes causes of errors timing chart Appendix gen...

Страница 6: ... while 0 is used to indicate Low The voltage value however differs from circuit to circuit In addition the asterisk as in DRMD indicates that the DRMD signal goes on when 0 In practically all cases the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked in the field Therefore the operations of the microprocessors used in the ma chines are not discussed they are explained in terms of from sen...

Страница 7: ...guration The iR5000 iR6000 may be configured with the following accessories for a fully inte grated system 1 2 3 5 6 4 1 Finisher F1 Saddle Finisher F2 2 Copy Tray C1 3 Shift Tray B1 4 DADF D1 standard 5 Paper Deck G1 6 Puncher Unit B1 C1 D1 Figure 1 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 8: ...at the Execution Memory lamp on the control panel is off before operating the main power switch 2 Do not turn off the main power switch while downloading is taking place Otherwise the machine may become disabled 3 The cassette heater and the drum heater remain powered as long as the environment switch and the heater switch are on even when the main power switch is off 4 Not all power is removed wh...

Страница 9: ...COPYRIGHT 2000 CANON INC 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000 iR6000 REV 0 JULY 2000 SYSTEM UNIT Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 10: ...Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 11: ...ocessing dither screen 2 10S 1 Features 1 1S 1 0 1 High Speed High Image Quality 1 1S 1 0 2 Hard Disk 1 1S 1 0 3 Stackless Duplexing Mechanism 1 1S 1 0 4 Large Capacity Paper Source 1 1S 1 0 5 Variety of Delivery Processing with accessories 1 1S 2 Specifications 1 2S 2 1 Copier 1 2S 2 1 1 Type 1 2S 2 1 2 Method 1 2S 2 1 3 Functions 1 3S 2 1 4 Others 1 8S 2 2 Paper Deck G1 1 11S 1 11S 2 3 Shift Tra...

Страница 12: ...ode normal operation 2 14S 4 4 Power Save Mode 2 14S 4 5 Low Power Mode 2 15S 4 5 1 Shift from Standby Mode standby low power 2 15S 4 5 2 Shift to Standby Mode low power standby 2 15S 4 6 Sleep Mode 2 15S 4 6 1 Shift from Standby Mode standby sleep 2 15S 4 6 2 Shift from Low Power Mode low power mode sleep 2 15S 4 6 3 Return to Standby Mode sleep standby 2 15S 4 7 Off Mode 2 16S 4 7 1 Shift from S...

Страница 13: ...COPYRIGHT 2000 CANON INC 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000 iR6000 REV 0 JULY 2000 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 14: ...Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 15: ...original once 1 0 3 Stackless Duplexing Mechanism The machine moves paper seamlessly when making double sided copies without any waste as by stacking it in a duplexing unit 1 0 4 Large Capacity Paper Source The addition of an accessory will enable accommodation of as many as 7650 sheets of pa per 80 g m2 Right front paper deck 1500 sheets Left front paper deck 1500 sheets Cassette 3 550 sheets Cas...

Страница 16: ...ensitive medium Item Reproduction Charging Exposure Copy density adjustment Development Pickup Transfer Separation Cleaning Fixing Auto Manual Specifications Indirect statophotography Corona Laser Auto or manual Dry 1 component toner production Front paper deck 2 holders Front cassette 2 holders Manual feed tray 5 5 mm deep about 50 sheets of 80 m2 paper Corona Corona static separation Blade Heat ...

Страница 17: ...1 0 611 Reduce IV 1 0 707 Reduce V 1 0 816 Reduce IV 1 0 865 Enlarge I 1 0 154 Enlarge II 1 1 224 Enlarge III 1 0 414 Enlarge IV 1 2 000 Enlarge V 1 4 000 Zoom 1 0 250 to 4 00 in 1 increments iR5000 5 min or less at 20 C 168 F iR6000 6 min or less at 20 C 168 F 5 5 sec stream reading right deck Direct A4 LTR non AE straight delivery 3 8 sec book mode right deck pickup Direct A4 LTR non AE straight...

Страница 18: ...LGL LTR LTRR STMT vertical feeding Tracing paper B4 A4 A4R Colored paper Canon recommended vertical feeding 64 to 80 g m2 A3 B4 A4 B5 A5R A4R B5R 279 4 431 8 mm 11 17 LGL LTR LTRR STMT vertical feed ing Tracing paper A3 B4 A4 B5 A4R B5R Transparency Canon recommended A4 A4R LTR LTRR Colored paper Canon recommended B4 A4 A4R Postcard vertical feeding only Postcard 2 in 1 postcard vertical feeding o...

Страница 19: ... LTRR Colored paper Canon recommended B4 A4 A4R Postcard vertical feeding only Postcard 2 in 1 postcard vertical feeding only 4 in 1 postcard horizontal feeding only Label sheet Canon recommended B4 A4 A4R LTR LTRR Thick paper 90 to 200 g m2 A3 B4 A4 B5 A4R B5R LTR LTRR Plain paper 64 to 80 g m2 A3 B4 A4 B5 A5R A4R B5R 279 4 431 8 mm 11 17 LGL LTR LTRR STMT vertical feed ing Colored paper Canon re...

Страница 20: ... STMT vertical feeding Colored paper Canon recommended B4 A4 A4R Thick paper 90 to 200 g m2 A3 B4 A4 B5 A4R B5R LTR LTRR Plain paper 64 to 80 g m2 A3 B4 A4 B5 A5R A4R B5R 279 4 431 8 mm 11 17 LGL LTR LTRR STMT vertical feeding Colored paper Canon recommended B4 A4 A4R Thick paper 90 to 200 g m2 A3 B4 A4 B5 A4R B5R LTR LTRR Item Double sided Auto Manual feed tray Download Free Service Manual at htt...

Страница 21: ...rox of 80 g m2 6 4 GB or 5 1 GB 1 Direct Enlarge Reduce 4 0 1 5 1 0mm 4 5 1 8mm 2 Direct Enlarge Reduce 2 0 1 5mm 2 0 1 8 mm 2 Direct Enlarge Reduce 2 5 1 5mm 2 5 2 0 mm 2 Yes 2 min standard may be changed between 0 and 9 min in 1 min increments No Yes 15 min standard may be changed in user mode for 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 90 min and 2 3 4 hr Yes 60 min standard may be changed to 10 15 20 30 40 50 60...

Страница 22: ...ence iR5000 995 Wh approx reference only iR6000 1008 Wh approx reference only By sound power level impulse mode iR5000 71 dB or less iR6000 78 dB or less iR5000 50 dB or less iR6000 55 dB or less 0 05 ppm or less 852 mm 33 5 in 726 mm 28 6 in 1134 mm 44 7 in 210 kg approx 470 4 lb approx Keep wrapped and store avoiding humidity Avoid direct sunlight and store at 40 C 85 RH or less Item Operating e...

Страница 23: ...mm A3 A5R A3 B5R B4 B5R A3 A4R B4 A4R B5R A5R A4 B5 A3 B4 A5R A3 A4R A3 B5R B4 A4R B4 A5 B5 B4 A3 B5 A4 Paper size A3 A4 B4 B5 A4R B5R A5R A5R B5R B5R A4R A4R A5R B5 B4 A3 A3 B4 B4 B5 A3 A4 copies min 1 to N iR5000 iR6000 30 30 50 60 36 36 50 60 38 41 40 44 50 60 50 60 40 44 40 44 38 41 38 41 50 60 50 60 36 36 30 30 30 30 36 36 36 36 50 60 30 30 50 60 Delivery by the machine auto paper select auto...

Страница 24: ...educe II 50 0 III 64 7 IV 73 3 V 78 6 Enlarge IV 200 0 III 129 4 II 121 4 Size 279 4 431 8 mm 11 17 LTR LGL LTRR STMTR 279 4 431 8 mm 11 17 STMTR 279 4 431 8 mm 11 17 LTRR 279 4 431 8 mm 11 17 LGL LGL LTRR STMTR 279 4 431 8 mm 11 17 LTRR 279 4 431 8 mm 11 17 LGL 279 4 431 8 mm 11 17 Paper size 279 4 431 8 mm 11 17 LTR LGL LTRR STMTR STMTR LTRR LGL LTRR 279 4 431 8 mm 11 17 279 4 431 8 mm 11 17 279...

Страница 25: ...rating environment Temperature Humidity Atmospheric pressure Specifications Clawless retard Side tray Plain paper 64 to 80 g m2 A4 B5 LTR Tracing paper SM 1 A4 B5 Colored paper Canon recommended A4 Thick paper 90 to 200 g m2 A4 B5 LTR Height 385 mm approx about 3500 sheets A4 type XCQ xxxxx LTR type XCRxxxxx By size guide plate in steps in service mode OPTION 326 2 W 583 D 574 5 H mm 12 8 W 23 0 D...

Страница 26: ...Temperature Humidity Atmospheric pressure Feeding Shifting Delivery direction w shift Shift direction w shift w o shift Specifications Same as host machine Same as host machine LTR LTRR LGL 279 4 431 8 mm 11 17 A4 A4R A3 Height 60 mm 2 4 in approx about 500 sheets of 64 g m2 50 mm or less between stacks 20 mm or more within stack between stacks 5 mm 100 mm or less XCSxxxxx 365 3 W 547 0 D 255 7 H ...

Страница 27: ...1 ADF 2 Main power switch 3 Original pickup tray 4 Manual feed tray 5 Right upper cover 6 Right lower cover 7 Waste toner box grip drum protection sheet case 8 Right front paper deck 9 Left front paper deck 10 Cassette 3 11 Cassette 4 12 Front cover 13 Delivery tray 14 Parallel connector for downloading 15 Slot for expansion board 16 Control panel power switch Download Free Service Manual at http ...

Страница 28: ...1 14 S 1 3 2 5 4 6 7 8 9 1 Delivery assembly cover 2 Control panel 3 Copyboard glass 4 Feeding assembly releasing lever 5 Service book case 6 Door switch assembly 7 Cassette heater switch 8 Environment switch 9 Leakage breaker F01 301 02 External View 2 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 29: ... 2000 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1 15 S 3 2 Cross Section F01 302 01 Cross Section 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 30 28 29 31 33 32 35 34 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 30: ...nual feed feed roller 22 Manual feed separation roller 23 Registration roller 24 Transfer charging assembly 25 Separation charging assembly 26 Right deck feed roller 27 Right deck separation roller 28 Right deck pickup roller 29 Right deck 30 Cassette 3 pickup roller 31 Cassette 3 feed roller 32 Cassette 3 separation roller 33 Cassette 4 pickup roller 34 Cassette 4 feed roller 35 Cassette 4 separa...

Страница 31: ...supplied with power when the main power switch is turned on i e other than in energy saver mode low power mode or sleep mode 1 Control panel power switch 2 Main power lamp 3 Main power switch F01 401 01 Arrangement of Switches 3 COPY Mail BOX SCAN ON OFF Reset Guide Interrupt Clear Error Processing Data Power Start Stop 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 C ID Display Contrast Energy Saver Additional Function Cou...

Страница 32: ...st Energy Saver Additional Function Counter Check 4 2 Control Panel 1 Counter Check key 2 Display Contrast dial 3 Copy key 4 Mail Box key 5 Scan key 6 Reset key 7 Number keys 8 Energy Saver key 9 Control panel power switch sub power supply 10 Stop key 11 Start key 12 Main power indicator 13 Clear key 14 Error lamp 15 Processing Data lamp 16 ID key 17 Interrupt key 18 Additional Function key 19 Gui...

Страница 33: ...ng sizes Use it to create a margin on the edge of a copy for binding Use it to erase the image of the frame or holes of an original from its copy Use it to reduce 2 4 or 8 originals automatically to print on a single sheet Use it to enlarge a single original automatically by dividing it into 2 or 4 to print on a sheet of a selected size Use it to reverse the black and white areas of the original o...

Страница 34: ... each cassette and side paper deck plain paper letterhead thick paper colored paper Use it to change the level of power save mode 10 25 50 None Use it to turn on off the mechanism used to assign a function key for disabling sleep mode power save mode on off Use it to set the level of power consumption for sleep mode low high Use it to turn off the mechanism used to distinguish an LTRR STMT origina...

Страница 35: ... the start of silent mode in which the laser scanner motor is put to rest 0 to 9 min 1 min Use it to set the time at which the control panel power switch is automatically turned off for the day of the week Sunday through Saturday 00 00 to 23 59 1 min intervals Factory setting Use it to register a Preference key on the Ba sic screen Select from mode keys and mode memory keys of mode memory on the E...

Страница 36: ...it to adjust the position of saddle stitch 2 0 to 2 0 mm 0 1mm incrmenets 0 mm Use it to correct any discrepancy between original and print images occurring while the density adjustment index is kept at the middle 9 steps 5 Mail Box Settings Box Set Store Photo Mode Standard Scan Settings Use it to register set a box 100 boxes max box No 0 to 99 ID No 4 digits file storage period 1 2 3 6 12 hr 1 2...

Страница 37: ...rd 7 digits administrator name 32 characters administrator mail ad dress administrator contact info ad ministrator comment Use it to register a device name and location Use it to enable disable ID control by group group ID ID No counter upper limit count control count all clear counter print non ID specific job print Use it to delete messages on the bul letin board Use it to make settings related ...

Страница 38: ...ver PCB Reader controller PCB Laser scanner Original Optical path Charging Development Trans fer Manual feed tray Cleaning Cassette 3 Delivery tray Cassette 4 Hard disk Accessory boards Right deck Left deck Paper deck accessory Controller block Control System Original illumination Original Exposure System Image Processing System Laser Exposure System Photosen sitive drum Fixing Sepa ration Feeding...

Страница 39: ...munications F01 502 01 DC controller PCB HVT PCB Potential control PCB CCD AP PCB BD PCB ADF Scanner motor Reader controller PCB Main controller PCB Control panel Inverter PCB LA2 Laser scanner motor M15 M3 IC125 CPU IC1010 CPU IC121 IC122 RAM RAM DC load clutch solenoid motor sensor fan etc Cassette inside paper level detection PCB Duplexing driver PCB DC load clutch solenoid motor sensor etc IC1...

Страница 40: ... Control card IV accessory Copy data controller accessory J1060 J1022 J5011 Laser scanner motor J5101 J116 J5007 Laser driver PCB J121 J102 J113 DC power supply PCB J101 J113 J113 AC driver PCB J102 J107 J1015 J122 J1017 J6801 J1018 J6505 J1012 J120 J5003 J104 J105 J5004 J1014 J2701 J6002 J2101 J2108 J1551 J1532 J1530 Numeric keypad PCB LCD panel LCD Inverter PCB Control panel CPU PCB J6504 J6509 ...

Страница 41: ...ipe ADF 5 Sheet assemblies Wipe with a moist cloth then dry wipe ADF 6 Platen guide Wipe with a moist cloth then dry wipe ADF 7 White plate Wipe with a moist cloth then dry wipe ADF copyboard cover 8 Read glass Wipe with a moist cloth then dry wipe Reader unit 9 Copyboard glass Wipe with a moist cloth then dry wipe Reader unit T01 601 01 Clean the ADF as follows 1 Open the feeder cover and wipe th...

Страница 42: ...an the sheet around them in the same way F01 601 02 3 Open the C guide and clean the rollers 5 pc in total with a moist cloth while turning he jam removal lever then wipe them with a dry soft cloth Likewise clean the sheet around the rollers in the same way F01 601 03 4 Wipe the rollers 4 pc in total with a moist cloth while turning them then wipe them with a dry soft cloth F01 601 04 Download Fre...

Страница 43: ... the feeder cover and open the ADF Wipe the copyboard glass with a moist cloth then wipe it with a dry soft cloth F01 601 05 6 Clean the white plate and the platen guide with a moist cloth Likewise clean the sheet around the platen in the same way At the end close the ADF F01 601 06 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 44: ...s shown be low 6 2 1 Making a Check 1 Press the test button in the machine s bottom left F01 602 01 2 Check to make sure that the open close lever shifts to OFF and the power turns off F01 602 02 3 After making the above check shift the open close lever to ON F01 602 03 4 Enter the date in the Breaker Check Sheet found at the back of the User s Manual Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 ...

Страница 45: ...COPYRIGHT 2000 CANON INC 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000 iR6000 REV 0 JULY 2000 CHAPTER 2 MAIN CONTROLLER Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 46: ...Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 47: ... Functional Construction The machine may be divided into the following functional blocks the controller block is shaded in the diagram F02 101 01 Control panel Printer unit Main controller PCB Reader unit Hard disk drive Accessory boards Controller block Image Processing System Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 48: ...f Control Items 1 2 3 Hard Disk Drive Name CPU RAM RAM DIMM ROM Description Controls image processing of input image data from the reader unit Controls image processing of output image data to the printer unit Controls the hard disk drive Controls the network interface DMA controller PCI interface and ROM RAM interface Controls the RAM interface Temporarily stores program data and image data Store...

Страница 49: ...000 REV 0 JULY 2000 CHAPTER 2 MAIN CONTROLLER 2 3 S F02 102 01 major PCBs Main controller PCB Printer unit Reader unit Control panel IC1010 CPU RAM Accessory boards IC6501 CPU DIMM ROM Hard disk drive HDD Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 50: ...re from the hard disk and write it to the SDRAM mounted to the DIMM socket on the main controller PCB For this reason it will be a while before the control panel becomes ready after the main power switch is turned on The control panel shows the following screen while the CPU writes the system software to the SDRAM and the progress of the start up sequence is indicated by means of a bar on the scre...

Страница 51: ...is program is designed to check the condition of the SDRAM and hard disk and indicates any error it detects on the control panel in the form of an error code F02 103 02 Related Error Code E601 0000 0001 Error in Image Transfer Information E602 0001 0002 Write Read Error Self diagnostic program Boot program Boot ROM CPU SD RAM System area Image data area Main controller PCB Hard disk drive HDD Acce...

Страница 52: ...te it to the system area of the SDRAM The machine s system software consists of multiple modules and the appropriate modules needed at a specific time are called into the system area of the SDRAM for execution F02 103 03 Self diagnostic program Boot program Boot ROM CPU SD RAM System area Image data area Main controller PCB Hard disk drive HDD Access to the program at execution Flow of the system ...

Страница 53: ...t Hard disk drive Reader unit Control Card IV accessory Copy Data Controller accessory J1060 J1022 J1015 J122 J1017 J6801 J1018 J6505 J1012 J5004 J1014 J1551 J1532 J1530 Keypad PCB LCD panel LCD program PCB Control panel CPU PCB J6504 J6509 J6604 J6506 J6507 J6503 Note The in the diagram indicates major wiring connections and does not indicate the flow of signals J6502 J6601 J6602 J6501 J6603 J650...

Страница 54: ...ensity conversion LUT Binary processing error division text text photo print photo Image memory control Binary processing dither screen print photo 8 Density correction conversion 8 8 8 Edge emphasis 1 Compression decompression rotation enlargement reduction SDRAM I O control HDD Image server 4 or 2 Thickening 4 or 2 1 Smoothing 1 Binary binary density conversion Printer unit Print PG 1 8 8 Enlarg...

Страница 55: ...t 2 2 5 Density Conversion LUT In this block luminance image signals are converted into density image signals and pro cessing is performed so that the output density curve best suited to each mode may be ob tained a LOG Conversion A LOG conversion table is used to convert luminance image signals possessing lumi nance data based on reflected light into density image signals possessing density data ...

Страница 56: ... 2 10 S 2 2 7 Binary Processing dither screen The machine s dither screen method is designed to convert the 8 bit image density signal of film photo mode into a 1 bit image density signal binary enabling 144 gradations for binary images 12x12 pixels Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 57: ...es In the case of text text photo mode a 600x600 dpi input image is converted into an im age of 1200 600 dpi In smoothing the image data is compared against several hundred templates 7 7 pixel pattern matrixes and each pixel in question is replaced as needed b When Outputting Printer PDL Images The type of smoothing best suited to PDL is performed while converting 300x300 dpi or 600 600 dpi data i...

Страница 58: ...des each for large size and small size a total of 16 mode types as shown below T02 300 02 Copying printing operation Sensor name Single sided Internal delivery sensor PS35 Double sided Double sided pre registration sensor PS30 Finisher in use Delivery sensor 1 At time of shipment B4 or less to include B4 in the large size category use service mode 2 The machine is not provided with a fax function ...

Страница 59: ...arentheses indicates the corresponding counter mode T02 300 02 2 The counter reading may be changed or its display may be enabled disabled in service mode not applicable to counter 1 T02 300 03 Descriptoin 1 Total A through L Total large ACEGIK Copy 1 ABGH Copy 1 large AG Pint 1 total CDEF Fax total 1 100 V model ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 120 230 V model ON ON ON ON OFF OFF Default change 2 No Yes Ye...

Страница 60: ... V non all night 3 3 VA 5 V non all night 5 V 24 V T02 402 01 4 3 Standby Mode normal operation Standby mode is used during normal operation or while the machine is ready for opera tion i e nearly all its power supplies are powered In addition to the main controller PCB the reader unit printer unit and control panel are all ready for communication control 4 4 Power Save Mode All power supplies are...

Страница 61: ...de In sleep mode only the 3 3 V all night 3 3 VB power supply is powered The CPU on the main controller PCB stops the programs thereby saving power the pro gram is stopped This mode is used only when the machine is used as a printer equipped with a network print option PDL print option 4 6 1 Shift from Standby Mode standby sleep A shift is made from standby mode to sleep mode under the following c...

Страница 62: ...from Low Power Mode low power mode off mode A shift is made from low power mode to off mode under the following conditions The control panel power switch soft switch is off Low power mode has continued for a specific period of time selected in user mode 4 7 3 Return to Standby Mode off mode standby In off mode an auto return to standby mode by means of an external command is not pos sible To turn ...

Страница 63: ...COPYRIGHT 2000 CANON INC 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000 iR6000 REV 0 JULY 2000 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 64: ...Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 65: ...xposed to direct sunlight provide a curtain 3 The level of ozone generated by the machine is not likely to affect the health of people around it Some individuals however may find its odor unpleasant calling for a good means of ventilation 4 Be sure that the machine s feet will be in contact with the floor and the machine will remain level 5 Be sure that the machine will be at least 10 cm away from...

Страница 66: ...so that the exhaust from one will not be drawn into another In general the silicone gas vaporized silicone oil from the fixing assembly will soil corona wires shortening their lives This phenomenon is particularly conspicuous in a low humidity environment Ventilation Wrong 1 Wrong 2 F03 100 02 F03 100 03 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 67: ...f the site of installation be sure to observe the following 2 1 Take out the ADF assembly fixing feeding assembly and duplexing unit and move them separately from the body 2 2 When lifting the machine do not use its four grips left right in stead hold it by its four bottom corners 2 3 The machine weighs 210 kg Be sure to work in a group of four 3 Shift up the two adjusters found on the machine s b...

Страница 68: ...sfer separation primary and pre transfer charging assemblies 5 Mounting the Developing Assembly 6 Mounting the Pickup assembly removing the pickup roller releasing spacers 7 Mounting the Deck Locking Plate left deck 8 Supplying Toner 9 Setting the Cassette 10 Changing the Paper Size for the Front Deck right left changing the paper size selecting the paper size service mode 11 Checking Images Opera...

Страница 69: ...therwise the adjusters can trip on the slope plates causing the machine to tumble Insert the grip that comes with the machine into the front of the pickup side Be sure to orient the stopper as shown when inserting it Otherwise it can slip off when the body is being lifted Take out the two slope plates from inside the skid Holding the two grips front rear found on the side of the delivery assembly ...

Страница 70: ...f the skid by sliding it on the slope plates Remove the packaging tape from the body Open the cardboard box that comes with the machine and take out the parts and compo nent members 2 4 Mounting the Scanner Step 1 2 Work Open the ADF and remove the packing ma terial Remove the scanner fixing screw and spacer 1 Take care not to let the spacer fall inside the machine 2 Store away the fixings for use...

Страница 71: ...ft to free the transfer separation charging assembly Slide out the fixing feeding assembly to the front Remove the separation claw releasing member and the tag from the fixing feed ing assembly Remove the tape and glue from the feeding belt Remove the retaining tape of the tag and open the fixing delivery assembly Fixing feeding assembly Releasing lever Tag Separation claw releasing member Tags Fi...

Страница 72: ...ON iR5000 iR6000 REV 0 JULY 2000 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 3 8 S Checks remarks Screw rear Screw front Step 5 6 Work Remove the two fixing nip releasing screws Close the fixing feeding assembly Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 73: ...the left upper direction Check the transfer separation charging as sembly if dirt or paper lint is found clean with alcohol Mount the transfer separation charging as sembly Connect the connector and fit the metal fix ing Do not bring the transfer separation charging assembly into contact with the transfer guide to avoid cutting the gut wire Further be sure that the solvent has evaporated completel...

Страница 74: ...n of the arrow right upper and secure it in place with a screw Disconnect the connector and take out the primary charging as sembly Check the primary charging as sembly if dirt or paper lint are found clean it with alcohol Disconnect the connector and remove the screw then take out the pre transfer charging assem bly Check the pre transfer charging assembly if dirt or paper lint are found clean it...

Страница 75: ... be sure to push it in horizontally in relation to the processing unit thus avoiding damage to the surface of the drum 3 Check to make sure that the one way arm of the pre transfer charging as sembly is on the eccentric cam Close the hopper and connect the connector of the hopper Fit and tighten the three screws and mount the connector cover then fit and tighten the screw of the door tape and clos...

Страница 76: ... unit in the direction of the arrow rear to detach Take out the developing assembly from the card board box Hold the developing assembly in the middle pocket of the grip and mount it to the machine Connect the connector When mounting the developing assem bly take care not to bring the developing cylinder into contact with the metal plate of the developing assembly base Insert the developing assemb...

Страница 77: ...he right then pull it out to the front Slide out the right deck and the cassette half way and open the right upper cover and right lower cover then remove the pickup roller releasing spacers of the right deck and cas sette 3 4 It will be difficult to remove the spacer if the deck cassette is set slide them out halfway to unlock the spacers After removing all spacers close the right upper cover and...

Страница 78: ...TION 3 14 S 2 9 Mounting the Deck Locking Plate left deck Screw Deck locking plate Checks remarks Step 1 2 Work Push the releasing button of the left deck and slide out the left deck Fit the deck locking plate with a screw Close the left deck Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 79: ...ter black of the body found on the right of the toner supply mouth of the hopper to the right Keep pulling until the shutter stops Pull the shutter of the toner bottle to the right Toner will be supplied from the toner bottle to the hopper Tap on the bottom of the toner bottle to make sure that all toner has moved to the hop per Push the shutter of the toner bottle to the left to close Push the ma...

Страница 80: ... the marking M M4 A3 Fit the Inch preventing roll that comes with the machine from inside the cassette so that it covers the hole STMT R identified by the marking A and the one LTR R identified by the marking H Be sure there is no gap Perform this step only when the use of Inch configured paper is not planned Set the cassettes to the appropriate sizes to suit the user s needs and attach the sticke...

Страница 81: ...nd guide plate Screw Screws Step 1 2 3 4 Work Press the release button and slide out the deck Remove the screw from the rear edge guide plate and the left and right guide plates then secure each guide plate to suit the size of the user s choice At time of shipment A4 Slide the deck into the ma chine Attach the appropriate size sticker to the paper size indi cator plate of the deck Turn on the powe...

Страница 82: ...e using service mode When the wait period is over start service mode and execute toner supply thereby supplying toner from the hopper to the developing assembly 1 Press the following in sequence to start service mode user mode 2 and 8 at the same time and user mode 2 Select COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL TONER S 3 Check that the following indication has appeared CHECK THE DEVEL OPER 4 Check to make sure ...

Страница 83: ...ating noise There must be no abnormal noise Default enlargement reduction The quality of images made at each ratio must be good Multiple copies As many copies as specified must be made normally If there is a difference in density between left and right adjust the height of the pri mary charging wire at the rear to correct At times toner may drop from the drum separation claw soiling about the firs...

Страница 84: ...used If the site requires that the drum cas sette heater remain on while the main power switch is turned off operate the following two switches Environment Switch It is designed for the drum heater and all night heaters and func tions as follows ON all night switch remains on the main power supply switch may be off or on OFF heater remains on only when the main power switch is on Checks remarks Do...

Страница 85: ...gether with the waste toner case cap and store it in the grip found at the top of the waste toner case 3 grip store it in the grip recess Do not roll the drum protec tion sheet Checks remarks Mount the cover to the right rear bottom Fit the covers to the grip assemblies If installation of an accessory sort etc is planned install it according to the Instal lation Procedure that comes with the acces...

Страница 86: ...y fixing feeding assembly releasing lever duplexing unit 6 Tape the covers decks and cassettes in place 7 Place A3 copy paper on the copyboard glass and tape the ADF in place 1 Be sure to observe the following if flights of stairs are used when mov ing the machine into or out of the site of installation 1 1 Take out the ADF fixing feeding assembly and duplexing unit they must be moved separately f...

Страница 87: ...aft Delivery roll E ring Delivery roll Screws Magnet catcher Step 1 2 3 4 5 Work Open the front cover and slide out the fixing feeding assembly then remove the two screws and detach the anti wrap cover Mount the delivery roll aligning it against the pin in the middle of the delivery roller then secure it in place with an E ring Mount the anti wrap cover with two screws and push the fixing feeding ...

Страница 88: ... holder to the ma chine right using the two stepped screws that come with the machine If the original holder is not needed fit the two rubber caps that come with the machine instead If it is difficult to mount the original holder try loosening the two mount ing screws Original holder Stepped screws Checks remarks Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 89: ...hole position so that the control card base is more or less outside the machine then mount the upper cover support plate Mount the Control Card IV to the upper cover support plate with one screw Disconnect the shorting connector from the cable and connect it to the cable of the Control Card IV Be sure to store away the shorting con nector It will be used when removing the Control Card IV for repai...

Страница 90: ...e upper cover of the controller See the Installation Procedure Connect the plug of the AC adapter to the con troller See the Installation Procedure Remove the four screws 1 and detach the face plate 2 of the rear upper cover Remove the rear upper cover and free the 8 pin cable 3 used to connect the controller from the cable clamp then let the cable hang as shown Be sure not to route the cable in t...

Страница 91: ...t the controller cable 4 from where the controller is mounted then connect it to the controller cable 5 Mount the controller 6 to the rear upper cover using four screws 7 Use the screws that come in the box Make various settings and check the operations as instructed in the NE Controller A1 Installation Procedure 4 5 7 6 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 92: ...Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 93: ...COPYRIGHT 2000 CANON INC 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000 iR6000 REV 0 JULY 2000 READER UNIT Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 94: ...Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 95: ...anging the Reproduction Ratio in Sub Scanning Direction 2 5R 2 Scanner Drive System 2 6R 2 1 Outline 2 6R 2 2 Controlling the Scanner Motor 2 7R 2 2 1 Controlling the Motor When Scanning an Image 2 7R 2 2 2 Reversing the Scanner After Scanning in Main Reading Direction 2 8R 3 Controlling the Scanning Lamp LA2 2 9R 3 1 Outline 2 9R 3 2 Scanning Lamp 2 9R 3 3 Turning On Off the Lamp 2 9R 3 4 Detecti...

Страница 96: ... the CCD Output 3 3R 2 4 A D Conversion of the CCD Output 3 3R 3 Digital Image Processing 3 4R 3 1 Outline 3 4R 3 2 Shading Correction 3 4R 3 2 1 Outline 3 4R 3 2 2 ShadingAdjustment 3 5R 3 2 3 Shading Correction 3 5R 3 2 4 Edge Gain Correction ADF in use 3 6R 3 3 Auto Density Adjustment AE 3 7R CHAPTER 3 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM 3 3 1 Outline 3 7R 3 3 2 ABC Circuit 3 7R 3 4 Related Service Mode 3 ...

Страница 97: ...COPYRIGHT 2000 CANON INC 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000 iR6000 REV 0 JULY 2000 CHAPTER 1 BASIC OPERATION Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 98: ...Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 99: ...tion The reader unit is divided into the following two functional blocks shaded 1 Original exposure block 2 Control block Controller unit Printer unit Reader controller PCB CCD AP PCB Original Original illumination Optical path Original Exposure Block Control Block F01 100 01 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 100: ... are controlled by the CPU on the reader control ler PCB The functions of the major ICs are as indicated in the following table 2 2 Reader Controller PCB Name CPU RAM EEP ROM ROM Description Controls the sequence of scanner operations Controls the original size detection mechanism Controls the CCD Controls the communications with the ADF Stores service mode data Stores user mode data Stores contro...

Страница 101: ... 100 secs after the scanning lamp turns on F01 301 01 3 2 Basic Sequence of Operations in Book Mode T01 302 01 1 Shading correction gain adjustment and CCD original size detection slash level adjust ment is executed for every job 2 Executed only at the end of a scan job F01 302 01 Name of period SREADY scanner ready SCFW scanner forward SCRV scanner reverse STBY standby Description From when the p...

Страница 102: ...Major PCBs 4 1 Wiring of Major PCBs Controller unit DC controller PCB CCD AP PCB Scanner motor Inverter PCB Reader controller PCB J5011 J5101 J5007 J5003 J5004 J6002 Note The symbol in the diagram indicates the major wiring route NOT the flow of signals M3 F01 401 01 Wiring of Major PCBs Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 103: ... controller PCB is OFF 24V OFF heater ON 5V Original sensor PS43 J5006 1 2 3 D_SENS3 J5053 3 2 1 1 2 3 When paper is detected 1 24V Scanner motor J5011 6 5 4 3 2 1 B B A A M3 Rotates in response to alternating 1 and 0 pulse signal Inverter PCB J5102 1 4 J5101 1 3 4 2 J5007 5 3 2 4 J5062 1 3 4 5 5 3 2 1 24V 24V LAMP_ON INV_ERR Reader controller PCB CCD AP PCB J6001 1 2 3 4 J5002 1 2 3 4 A12V GND GN...

Страница 104: ...uts from the Reader Controller PCB 2 2 F01 402 02 Reader controller PCB Printer unit DC power supply PCB J5010 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 3 4 1 2 24V GND J5005 1 2 GND 24V GND ADF_RX ADF_TX ADF_ITOP GND 24V GND J8500 See the ADF Service Manual To ADF To ADF connector J5105 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 105: ...COPYRIGHT 2000 CANON INC 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000 iR6000 REV 0 JULY 2000 CHAPTER 2 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 106: ...Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 107: ...ing is per formed by the controller unit In sub scanning direction the speed of the No 1 mirror base is changed 50 or higher in addition the image data is processed by the controller unit lower than 50 2 Using the ADF 25 to 200 In main scanning direction the image data is processed by the controller unit In sub scanning direction the speed at which the origi nals are moved is changed 50 or higher ...

Страница 108: ... reverse Light blocking plate No 1 mirror base Scanning lamp LA2 Scanner HP sensor PS39 F02 101 01 The major components of the original exposure system are as follows Component Scanning lamp Scanner motor Scanner HP sensor Copyboard cover sensor Mirror Notation LA2 M3 PS39 PS40 Description Xenon lamp intensity of 70 000 lx 2 phase stepping motor under pulse control Photointerrupter detects scanner...

Страница 109: ...tion 1 The copyboard cover is opened The scanner moves to the point of original size detection 2 The copyboard cover is closed When the original size has been detected the scanner moves to home position 3 The Start key is pressed After shading correction the scanner moves to start position 4 The scanner scans the original 5 The scanner returns to start position at the speed used for 50 reduction 6...

Страница 110: ...tion 2 The Start key is pressed After the original size has been detected the scanner moves to home position 3 After shading correction in home position the scanner moves to start position 4 The scanner scans the original 5 The scanner returns to start position at the speed used for 50 reduction 6 The scanner moves to the point of original size detection HP Image leading edge Image end Stop positi...

Страница 111: ...e data from the line memory 1 3 2 Changing the Reproduction Ratio in Sub Scanning Direction The reproduction ratio in sub scanning direction is changed by controlling the speed of the scanner and the speed at which originals are moved For a reduction between 25 and 49 however the main controller unit also functions to change the ratio by processing data 1 To enlarge the speeds at which the mirror ...

Страница 112: ...9 2 Scanner Drive System 2 1 Outline The following parts are associated with the scanner drive system F02 201 01 1 Scanner Motor M3 Control Signal Used to turn on off the motor and to control its direction and speed of rotation 2 Scanner HP Sensor PS39 Detection Signal Used to make sure that the No 1 mirror base is at home position 3 Copyboard Cover Sensor PS40 Detection Signal Used to detect the ...

Страница 113: ...anner motor and controls its direction and speed of rotation in keeping with the signals from the CPU IPC and speed control circuit F02 202 01 2 2 1 Controlling the Motor When Scanning an Image When scanning an image the motor is controlled as follows thereby controlling the movement of the No 1 mirror base unit 1 Acceleration Used to accelerate until the speed most appropriate to the read ratio i...

Страница 114: ...sensor identifies the presence of the No 1 mirror base when the No 1 mirror base should have been moved away E204 image leading edge detection error 1 The image signal is not generated when the No 1 mirror base is moving forward 2 The ADF does not generate the image leading edge signal in stream reading mode COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY ADJ X scanner image leading edge adjustment Enter an appropriate valu...

Страница 115: ...Lamp The machine s scanning lamp is a xenon lamp of a non electrode discharge type in which xenon gas is sealed in a tube On the outside of the glass tube two electrodes are arranged parallel to the tube axis and the inner side of the glass tube is coated with fluorescent material The internal gas discharges and as a result the fluorescent material glows when a high frequency voltage is applied ac...

Страница 116: ...error e g output open short circuit leak in the inverter circuit A fault in the lamp low inten sity activation failure will be identified as an activation error caused by lack of intensity during initial activation e g at time of shading correction E220 It is used to indicate a fault in the inverter PCB E225 It is used to indicate a fault in the scanning lamp xenon tube Download Free Service Manua...

Страница 117: ... the Sensor Output Level The scanning lamp is turned on and the CCD level at each point of detection in main scanning direction is measured In addition the reflection type photosensor in sub scanning direction is turned on to measure the sensor output The combination of these output measurements is used to identify the size of the origi nal For specific movements see the pages that follow 4 Detect...

Страница 118: ...rnal light in main scanning direction No 1 mirror base to point of original de tection Xenon lamp off Original sensor disabled 3 An original is placed The width of the original is identified in relation to the presence absence of external light here the absence of an original is identified at points in question eliminating B5 B4 A4 and A3 4 The Start key is pressed In response original detection i...

Страница 119: ...ght in main scanning direction No 1 mirror base to point of original de tection Xenon lamp off Original sensor disabled 3 An original is set The width of an original is identified in terms of the presence or absence of exter nal light here the external light is blocked and the absence of an original is identified excluding B5 B4 A4 and A3 Point of original detection Point of original detection 1 P...

Страница 120: ...r main scanning direction the xenon lamp is turned on and the CCD checks for reflected light 4 points For sub scanning direction the original sensor starts detection 5 The copyboard cover is fully closed The changes in the output level of each sensor are monitored until the copyboard cover is fully closed The absence of a change is identified as indicating the ab sence of paper and the size of the...

Страница 121: ...t cover then de tach the reader front cover 4 Remove the reader controller PCB 5 Move the No 1 mirror base 1 as far as the cut in made in the frame 6 Remove the three screws 2 from the No 1 mirror base and detach the scan ning lamp 3 together with the cable fixing plate 4 F02 501 01 7 Disconnect the connector 6 from the inverter PCB 5 and remove the screw 7 then detach the cable fixing plate 8 F02...

Страница 122: ... Do not leave fingerprints on the surface of the scanning lamp If the surface of the scanning lamp is soiled dry wipe it Do not touch the light window of the scanning lamp as when mounting it Do not subject the scanning lamp to im pact 5 3 After Replacing the Scanning Lamp Execute CCD auto adjustment in service mode and record the updated CCD adjustment data on the service label 1 CCD Auto Adjustm...

Страница 123: ...he reader controller 3 Remove the screw 1 and detach the ADF base right 2 4 Remove the five screws 3 and detach the motor cover 4 F02 601 01 5 Remove the two springs 5 and re move the three screws 6 then while shifting the motor unit 7 in the direc tion of the arrow detach the belt F02 601 02 6 Remove the two screws 8 and detach the scanner motor 10 from the motor base 9 F02 601 03 1 2 4 3 3 5 6 6...

Страница 124: ...SYSTEM 2 18 R 6 1 2 Mounting the Scanner Motor 1 Attach the belt 3 to the pulley 2 of the scanner motor 1 2 Fit the motor base to its position fit the two springs to provide tension to the belt then secure it in place with three screws F02 601 04 3 2 1 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 125: ... Remove the copyboard glass 3 Remove the reader left cover and the reader front cover 4 Remove the motor cover See steps 1 through 4 used to the motor 5 Remove the five screws 1 and detach the PCB base 2 F02 602 01 6 Remove the screw 3 and detach the ADF base left 4 then remove the three screws 5 and detach the copyboard sensor base 7 F02 602 02 7 Remove the 15 screws 7 and remove the two screws 8...

Страница 126: ...NAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM 2 20 R 11 12 13 10 11 8 Remove the two cable fixing screws 11 of the No 1 mirror base 10 9 Remove the two springs 12 used to secure the cable in place 10 Remove the cable fixing plate 13 and each pulley cable F02 602 04 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 127: ... of the cable into the hole of the drive pulley and wind the cable 4 times in ward 5 times outward then tape it in place When winding be sure that the cable metal fixing is inside 3 Hook the cable on each pulley and temporarily fix one end to the cable fixing plate and the other end to the hook of the reader frame 4 Temporarily fix the cable metal fixing to the No 1 mirror base Do not fully secure...

Страница 128: ...rame 2 Secure the positions 2 of the four left right claws using screws 3 Fit the two screws 3 at the end F02 602 06 6 2 3 Positioning the No 1 2 Mirror Base 1 Set the pins of the mirror position tool as indicated F02 602 07 1 3 1 1 1 2 Initial FY9 3009 040 configuration for front Configuration used for the machine for front Initial FY9 3009 040 configuration for rear Configuration used for the ma...

Страница 129: ... No 2 mirror base is adjusted by sliding the cable fixing plate to the front and the rear F02 602 08 F02 602 09 3 Secure the end of the cable so far tem porarily fixed to the hook of the reader frame using a spring 4 Fully tighten the screw on the cable fix ing plate 5 Fully tighten the cable metal fixing on the No 1 mirror base 6 Detach the mirror positioning tool 7 Reverse steps 1 through 6 for ...

Страница 130: ... Size Sensor 1 Remove the copyboard glass 2 Move the No 1 mirror base to the left end 3 Remove the screw 1 and disconnect the connector 2 then free the cable from the cable clamp 3 and detach the original sensor unit 4 F02 701 01 When removing the original sensor take care not to damage it against the cable 5 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 131: ...om the reader unit 2 Remove the reader rear cover 3 Remove the screw 1 and detach the ADF base left 2 4 Remove the three screws 3 and detach the fuse base 4 F02 702 01 5 Remove the screw 5 and detach the sensor base 7 then disconnect the connector 8 and detach the HP sensor 8 from the base F02 702 02 1 2 4 3 5 7 6 8 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 132: ...moving the Copyboard Sensor 1 Remove the reader rear cover 2 Remove the three screws 1 and detach the fuse PCB base 2 F02 703 01 3 Disconnect the connector 3 and re move the screw 4 then detach the copyboard sensor cover 7 and the copyboard sensor 6 F02 703 02 1 2 3 6 4 5 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 133: ...POSURE SYSTEM 2 27 R 8 PCBs 8 1 Removing the Fuse PCB 1 Remove the reader rear cover 2 Remove the three screws 1 and detach the fuse PCB 2 3 Remove the screw 3 and disconnect the three connectors 4 then detach the fuse PCB 5 F02 801 01 3 4 4 5 4 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 134: ...ht upper cover base 2 Remove the reader controller PCB 3 Disconnect the two connectors from the inverter PCB 1 F02 802 01 4 Remove the three screws 3 and de tach the stopper 4 then pull out the inverter unit 5 F02 802 02 5 Remove the two screws 7 and discon nect the connector 7 then detach the inverter PCB 8 F02 802 03 2 2 1 3 4 5 8 6 7 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 135: ...POSURE SYSTEM 2 29 R Points to Note When Mounting the Inverter PCB When fitting the inverter PCB 1 into the reader frame be sure to fit the leading edge 2 of the frame of the inverter PCB into the mounting hole in the reader frame F02 802 04 2 1 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 136: ...Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 137: ...COPYRIGHT 2000 CANON INC 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000 iR6000 REV 0 JULY 2000 CHAPTER 3 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 138: ...Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 139: ...1 Number of pixels 7450 Size of pixel 4 7 x 4 7 µm 2 Shading Correction Shading adjustment executed in service mode Shading correction executed for each copy 3 Auto Density Adjustment AE Executed for each line in main scanning direction The image processing system consists of the following functional blocks F03 100 01 Each of the PCBs used in the image processing system has the following functions...

Страница 140: ...Shift register Output buffer Output buffer Gate Gate 1 2 3 4 5 6 Odd number pixel data Even number pixel data 2 Analog Image Processing 2 1 Outline Analog image processing is performed by the CCD AP PCB which has the following major functions 1 Drives the CCD 2 Corrects the gain in the CCD output corrects offset 3 Performs A D conversion of CCD output F03 201 01 2 2 Driving the CCD The machine s C...

Страница 141: ...in offset correction on the other hand the output voltage in the absence of in coming light is set to a specific level 2 4 A D Conversion of the CCD Output The analog video signals of odd number and even number pixels after correction are con verted into 8 bit digital signals that correspond to specific pixel voltage levels by the A D converter COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY ADJ Y CCD read start position ad...

Страница 142: ...ne The output of the CCD will not necessarily be uniform because of the following factors even if the density of the original in question is perfectly uniform 1 The level of sensitivity of a CCD pixel differs from that of another 2 The level of penetration of light differs between the center and the periphery of a lens 3 The intensity of the scanning lamp differs between the middle and the ends of...

Страница 143: ...hading correction The adjustment is designed for service mode and is used upon installation of the machine after replacement of the scanning lamp or when correcting changes in the intensity of the scanning lamp oc curring over time 3 2 3 Shading Correction This correction is executed each time an original is scanned The density of the standard white plate is measured and the result is compared aga...

Страница 144: ...DF in use In stream reading with the ADF in use the No 1 mirror base is fixed in position To check for changes in the intensity of the scanning lamp the edge gain correction plate gray mounted at the edge of read position is read and a gain that enables the attainment of a specific intensity is computed The result is used to correct the data which otherwise would be affected by changes in the inte...

Страница 145: ...spaper some originals have a dark background Auto density cor rection is executed to reproduce the information text graphics of such originals by remov ing the background This adjustment is enabled in density auto mode or when text mode is selected and data is processed by the ABC circuit 3 3 2 ABC Circuit A colored background is identified as being white by changing the height of the dynamic rang...

Страница 146: ...UST CCD OFST E O offset adjustment input of CCD output COPIER ADJUST CCD SH_RATIO white level ratio data of stan dard white plate and standard white paper during shading correc tion If a faulty image is generated after executing shading auto adjustment enter the parameter values indicated on the service label COPIER ADJUST AE AE TBL text density adjustment for real time AE mode Use it to change th...

Страница 147: ... the two screws 1 and remove the reader right cover 2 then detach the copyboard glass 3 F03 401 01 2 Open the hopper cover 4 and remove the three screws 5 then detach the right upper cover 6 F03 401 02 3 Remove the four screws 7 and detach the right upper cover base 9 together with the card controller base 9 and the copyboard base 10 F03 401 03 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspo...

Страница 148: ...EV 0 JULY 2000 CHAPTER 3 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM 3 10 R 4 Remove the two screws 11 and detach tje reader left cover 12 then remove the two screws 13 and detach tje reader front cover 14 F03 401 04 11 12 13 14 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 149: ...0 CANON iR5000 iR6000 REV 0 JULY 2000 CHAPTER 3 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM 3 11 R 4 2 Removing the Reader Rear Cover 1 Remove the five screws 1 and detach the rear cover 2 F03 402 01 1 1 2 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 150: ...pper cover base 4 Remove the reader left cover and the reader front cover 5 Remove the eight screws 1 and dis connect the connector 2 then detach tje CCD shielding plate 3 F03 501 01 6 Remove the screw 4 and disconnect the connector 5 then free the cable from the cable clamp 6 and detach the original sensor unit 7 F03 501 02 7 Remove the four screws 8 and dis connect the connector 9 then free the ...

Страница 151: ... R 5 2 When Replacing the CCD AP PCB Be sure to execute CCD auto adjustment in service mode and record the updated CCD adjustment data on the service label 1 CCD Auto Adjustment COPIER FUNCTION CCD CCD ADJ 2 CCD Adjustment data all items under COPIER ADJUST CCD Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 152: ...CB 1 Remove the reader rear cover 2 Disconnect tje nine connectors and re move the flat cable 1 seven screws 2 and cable guide 3 then detach the reader controller PCB 4 Take care not to damage the flat cable removed in step 2 F03 601 01 6 2 When Replacing the Reader Controller PCB See the Troubleshooting Manual Chap 3 7 Electrical Parts Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 153: ...COPYRIGHT 2000 CANON INC 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000 iR6000 REV 0 JULY 2000 PRINTER UNIT Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 154: ...Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 155: ...nit 1 3P 1 4 Safety of Toner 1 6P 2 Image Formation 1 7P 2 1 Outline 1 7P CHAPTER 2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS 1 4 1 Outline 2 6P 1 5 Inputs to and Outputs from the Major PCBs 2 7P 1 5 1 Wiring Diagram of Major PCBs 2 7P 1 5 2 Inputs to the DC Controller PCB 2 8P 1 5 3 Inputs to the DC Controller PCB 2 14P CHAPTER 3 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM 1 Outline of Operations 3 1P 1 1 Outline 3 1P 1 2 Basic Sequence...

Страница 156: ...rolling the Output to Suit the Environment fuzzy control 4 24P 3 4 3 Cleaning Mechanism for the Pre Transfer Charging Assembly 4 25P 3 4 4 Others 4 26P 3 5 Controlling Transfer Charging 4 27P 3 5 1 Outline 4 27P 3 5 2 Controlling the Output to Suit the Environment fuzzy control 4 28P 3 5 3 Cleaning Mechanism for the Transfer Charging Assembly 4 29P 3 5 4 Others 4 30P 3 6 Controlling Separation Cha...

Страница 157: ...arging Assembly 4 63P 7 8 Charging Wire 4 66P 7 8 1 Outline 4 66P 7 8 2 Removing the Wire Cleaner of the Primary Charging Assembly 4 66P 7 8 3 Routing the Charging Wire 4 66P 7 8 4 Routing the Grid for the Primary Charging Assembly 4 69P 7 8 5 Adjusting the Height of the Charging Wire 4 71P 7 8 6 Cleaning the Primary Anti Stray Sheet 4 72P 7 9 Developing Assembly 4 73P 7 9 1 Removing the Developin...

Страница 158: ...Sending Paper to the Reversing Assembly After Printing on the First Side 5 26P 4 1 2 Sending Paper from the Revers ing Assembly to the Duplexing Feeding Assembly 5 27P 4 1 3 Outline 5 28P 4 2 Sequence of Operations printing 5 29P 4 3 Through Path Operation 5 30P 4 3 1 Outline 5 30P 4 3 2 Outline of Operations 5 31P 4 4 Detecting Horizontal Registration Position 5 35P 4 4 1 Outline 5 35P 4 4 2 Oper...

Страница 159: ...emoving the Lifter Motor M20 M21 of the Cassette 3 4 5 61P 9 2 14 Adjusting the Position of the Lifter Motor M20 M21 of the Cassette 3 cassette 4 5 61P 9 2 15 Adjusting the Position of the Cassette 3 4 Pickup Solenoid SL3 4 5 63P 9 3 Vertical Path Roller Assembly 5 64P 9 3 1 Removing theVertical Path Roller 1 5 64P 9 3 2 Removing theVertical Path Roller 2 5 64P 9 3 3 Removing theVertical Path Roll...

Страница 160: ... Separation Claw 6 10P 3 Controlling the Fixing Temperature 6 11P 3 1 Outline 6 11P 3 2 Temperature Control 6 12P 3 2 1 Normal Sequence 6 13P 3 2 2 Temperature Control by Mode 6 15P 3 3 Detecting Errors 6 18P 4 Disassembly and Assembly 6 20P 4 1 Fixing Assembly 6 21P 4 1 1 Removing the Fixing Feeding Unit 6 21P 4 1 2 Removing the Fixing Assembly 6 22P 4 2 Fixing Roller Cleaning Assembly 6 24P 4 2 ...

Страница 161: ...ence of Operations 7 4P 3 Power Supply 7 5P 3 1 Power Supply 7 5P 3 1 1 Outline 7 5P 3 1 2 Distribution of Power Among Switches 7 6P 3 1 3 Output of Power Supplies 7 8P 3 2 Rated Outputs of the DC Power Supply 7 9P 3 3 Protection Mechanism 7 10P 4 Others 7 12P 4 1 Silent Mode 7 12P 5 Disassembly and Assembly 7 13P 5 1 1 External Covers 7 14P 5 1 2 Removing the Front Cover 7 15P 5 2 Arrangement of ...

Страница 162: ...ckup Roller Releasing Solenoid SL6 7 40P 5 8 2 Adjusting the Position of the Right Deck Pickup Solenoid SL6 7 40P 5 8 3 Right Deck Pickup Roller Releasing Solenoid SL7 7 41P 5 8 4 Adjusting the Position of the Left Deck Pickup Solenoid SL7 7 41P 5 9 Clutches 7 42P 5 9 1 Manual Feed Pickup Clutch Developing Clutch 7 42P 5 10 Sensors 7 43P 5 10 1 Cassette 3 4 Paper Size width length Sensor 7 43P 5 1...

Страница 163: ...7P 3 2 3 Changing the Deck Paper Size Configuration 8 29P 3 2 4 Adjusting the Deck Registration 8 30P 3 2 5 Adjusting the Roll Position 8 30P 3 3 Drive Mechanisms 8 31P 3 3 1 Removing the Deck Pickup Clutch CL102 8 31P 3 3 2 Removing the Deck Main Motor M101 8 31P 3 3 3 Removing the Deck Lifter Motor M102 8 32P 3 3 4 Removing the Lifter Cable front of the deck 8 33P 3 3 5 Removing the Lifter Cable...

Страница 164: ...from the Shift Tray Driver PCB 9 4P 4 Outline of Operations 9 5P 4 1 Shifting 9 5P 4 2 Stacking 9 5P 4 3 Detecting paper 9 6P 4 4 Delivery 9 6P 5 Maintenance and Inspection 9 7P 5 1 Adjusting the Limit Sensor Position 9 7P 5 1 1 Related Service Mode 9 7P 5 1 2 MakingAdjustments 9 7P 6 Disassembly and Assembly 9 9P 6 1 Removing the Shift Tray Driver PCB 9 10P 6 2 Removing the Tray Drive Unit 9 12P ...

Страница 165: ...COPYRIGHT 2000 CANON INC 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000 iR6000 REV 0 JULY 2000 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 166: ...Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 167: ...uses the machine under normal operating conditions 1 2 Regulations Under the Center for Devices and Radiologi cal Health The Center for Devices and Radiological Health of the Food and Drug Administration US government agency put in force regulations governing laser products on August 2 1976 Under the regulations laser products manufactured on and after August 1 1976 cannot be sold in the United St...

Страница 168: ...00 2000 CANON iR5000 iR6000 REV 0 JULY 2000 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1 2 P F01 102 01 CDRH Label The descriptions on the label may differ among different models of a prod uct Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 169: ... unit Further it is also important to get into the habit of removing watches rings or the like which could reflect laser light to the eye The machine s laser light is red in color The covers used to block laser light are identified by the following label calling for special attention when servicing behind the covers The label is attached to covers used to block laser light inside the machine F01 1...

Страница 170: ...00 2000 2000 CANON iR5000 iR6000 REV 0 JULY 2000 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1 4 P F01 103 02 Laser Caution Label 100 120 V model F01 103 03 Laser Caution Label 230 V model Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 171: ...T 2000 CANON INC 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000 iR6000 REV 0 JULY 2000 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1 5 P F01 103 04 Laser Caution Label 230 V model Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 172: ... clothes have come into contact with toner remove as much of it as you can with paper and wash with water Do not use hot water to avoid turning the toner into a gel It will fuse with the fibers of cloth making removal difficult Toner tends to react to vinyl and dissolve Do not allow it to come into contact with vinyl material Do not pour toner into fire Such an act can lead to explosion Download F...

Страница 173: ...es and is con structed as follows F01 201 01 Construction of the Machine Copyboard glass Scanning lamp Primary charging assembly Pre exposure LED Potential sensor Dust collecting roller Pickup manual feed tray Pickup deck cassette Transfer assembly Separation charging assembly Cleaning assembly Fixing assembly Separation claw Pre transfer charging assembly Download Free Service Manual at http prin...

Страница 174: ... 4 Development AC positive DC Step 5 Transfer negative DC Step 6 Separation AC positive DC Step 7 Fixing Step 8 Drum cleaning Deposits toner on the VD Used also for blank exposure F01 201 02 Static Image Formation Block 1 Pre exposure 2 Primary charging 3 Laser exposure 4 Development 5 Transfer 7 Fixing 6 Separation Delivery Deck cassette Registration Manual feed tray flow of paper rotation of dru...

Страница 175: ...COPYRIGHT 2000 CANON INC 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000 iR6000 REV 0 JULY 2000 CHAPTER 2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 176: ...Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 177: ...ck Pickup feeding block Control panel DC controller PCB Controller unit Reader unit DC power supply PCB Laser driver PCB Laser scanner Charging Development Trans fer Pickup control Manual feed tray Cleaning Lower feeding assembly Cassette 3 Delivery tray Feeding Sepa ration Fixing Photo sensitive drum Cassette 4 Right deck Left deck Paper deck accessory Control Block Laser Exposure Block Image For...

Страница 178: ...ms Name CPU RAM DIMM ROM EEP ROM ROM Description Controls jobs Controls state of operation Controls fixing temperature Controls high voltage Controls potential Controls toner supply Controls paper feeding Controls printing sequence Controls output Controls motors Controls finisher accessory Controls communications with controller unit Controls service mode Stores service mode data Stores user mode...

Страница 179: ...er unit Controller unit Control panel M15 IC125 CPU IC121 IC122 RAM DC loads clutch solenoid motor sensor fan etc Cassette paper level detection PCB Duplexing driver PCB DC load clutch solenoid motor sensor etc IC120 IPC communi cation 2 DIMM ROM IC117 Finisher accessory AC driver PCB IC104 105 IC109 110 IC127 130 EEPROM Laser driver PCB Laser scanner motor Download Free Service Manual at http pri...

Страница 180: ...al control ended in error or potential control is executed in service mode 4 If the surface temperature of the fixing roller when the power is turned on is 100ºC or lower the primary pre transfer transfer separation charging wire will be cleaned Cleaning is also executed each time 2000 copies have been made Power switch ON Developing bias DC Developing bias AC Bias roller Pre transfer charging DC ...

Страница 181: ...00 C this is to even out the surface temperature of the fixing roller From when INTR ends to when the drum surface potential for copying has been measured this is to measure the drum surface potential VD VL1 VL2 and to control it From when CNTR1 ends to when the drum surface potential for printing has been measured this is to measure the drum surface po tential VD VL1 VL2 and to control it While t...

Страница 182: ...icate E010 in the con trol panel F02 104 01 Control Block Diagram T02 104 01 Item Power supply drive signal Operating driving Control Error detection Description 24V is supplied by the DC controller PCB from the DC controller PCB MMON Waste toner feedscrew Cleaning assembly Registration roller Manual feed pickup assembly Left deck feed roller 2 Developing assembly unit Turning on off the motor Con...

Страница 183: ...level detection PCB Duplexing driver PCB HVT PCB Reader controller PCB J103 Laser scanner motor J116 Laser driver PCB J102 J113 DC power supply PCB J101 J113 J113 AC driver PCB J102 J107 J1015 J122 J6801 J1018 J6505 J1012 J120 J104 J105 J5004 J1014 J2701 J2101 J2108 Control panel PCB M15 J810 J2052 J806 J8492 J4502 J4003 J2511 J2302 J3 Note The symbol in the diagram indicates major connections and...

Страница 184: ... PS6 J112 A3 A2 A1 J512 1 2 3 RDLTP J511 A7 A8 A9 A3 A2 A1 5V Right deck paper sensor PS7 J112 A6 A5 A4 J513 1 2 3 RDPD J511 A4 A5 A6 A6 A5 A4 5V Deck right limit sensor PS8 J112 B9 B8 B7 J518 1 2 3 RDEL J511 B1 B2 B3 B9 B8 B7 5V Deck left open closed sensor PS9 J115 A15 A14 A13 J569 1 2 3 LDEOP J561 1 2 3 15 14 13 J113 A15 A14 A13 J8508 1 2 3 J801 A1 A2 A3 A15 A14 A13 J809 1 2 3 4 3 2 When the ri...

Страница 185: ...tte 3 open closed sensor PS15 J110 A12 A11 A10 J535 1 2 3 C3OP J531 B7 B8 B9 B3 B2 B1 5V Cassette 4 open closed sensor PS16 J110 B12 B11 B10 J545 1 2 3 C4OP J541 B7 B8 B9 B3 B2 B1 5V Cassette 3 lifter sensor PS17 J110 A3 A2 A1 J532 1 2 3 C3LTP J531 A7 A8 A9 A3 A2 A1 5V Cassette 4 lifter sensor PS18 J110 B3 B2 B1 J542 1 2 3 C4LTP J541 A7 A8 A9 A3 A2 A1 When paper is detected 1 When the lifter has r...

Страница 186: ...Vertical path 2 paper sensor PS25 J113 A3 A2 A1 J1521 1 2 3 VP2PD J801 A13 A14 A15 A3 A2 A1 5V Vertical path 3 paper sensor PS26 J110 A15 A14 A13 J536 1 2 3 VP3PD J531 B4 B5 B6 B6 B5 B4 5V Vertical path 4 paper sensor PS27 J110 B15 B14 B13 J546 1 2 3 VP4PD J541 B4 B5 B6 B6 B5 B4 J803 1 2 3 3 2 1 J802 1 2 3 3 2 1 When paper is detected 1 When paper is detected 1 When paper is detected 1 When paper ...

Страница 187: ...J2302 A1 J227 1 2 3 LDPFS J107 A16 J235 1 2 3 J107 B14 DPDS J234 4 5 6 3 2 1 Duplexing driver PCB J2306 B8 B7 B6 J222 B3 B14 J2302 B3 J274 1 2 3 8 7 6 When paper is detected 1 When paper is detected 1 When paper is detected 1 When paper is detected 1 When paper is detected 1 When paper is detected 1 5V Laser write start sensor PS28 J113 B3 B2 B1 J1519 1 2 3 LWRPD J801 B13 B14 B15 B3 B2 B1 Registra...

Страница 188: ... J573 1 2 3 LDPD1 J5701 4 5 6 3 2 1 5V Left deck paper level sensor lower PS50 J115 B12 B11 B10 J574 1 2 3 LDPD2 J5701 1 2 3 6 5 4 J251 B16 B5 J274 4 5 6 5 4 3 When paper is detected 1 When paper is detected 1 When paper is detected 1 When paper is detected 1 When paper is detected 1 When paper is detected 1 Reversal sensor 1 PS37 J107 B15 J1513 1 2 3 RVS1 Reversal sensor 2 PS38 J226 2 3 4 3 2 1 D...

Страница 189: ... J810 1 2 3 J801 B7 B8 B9 B9 B8 B7 C3PLV The voltage changes according to the width of paper The voltage changes according to the number of sheets The voltage changes according to the number of sheets The voltage changes according to the width of paper The voltage changes according to the width of paper The signal changes according to the length of paper The signal changes according to the length ...

Страница 190: ...l See p 4 5P HUM1 5V HUM OUT TH J113 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 J8492 1 2 3 4 5 J801 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 When the humidity inside the machine increases the voltage decreases analog signal When the temperature inside the machine increases the voltage decreases analog signal When the temperature of the fixing roller increases the voltage decreases analog signal When the temperature of the fixing r...

Страница 191: ...15 A5 A6 J717 2 1 1 2 Fixing assem bly inlet guide drive solenoid 24V Manual feed releasing solenoid MFLSD When 0 ON J726 2 1 7 8 Cassette 3 pickup solenoid Cassette 4 pickup solenoid SL2 24V SL1R When 0 the plunger is pushed i e the inlet guide lowers J252 6 5 4 8 9 10 SL1 24V C3PUSD When 0 ON SL3 24V C4PUSD When 0 ON SL4 J106 A13 A14 Delivery flapper solenoid 24V RVFSD1 When 0 ON J274 8 7 1 2 SL...

Страница 192: ...K signal to the PCB While the fan is rotating 1 24 V for full speed 12 V for half speed While in constant speed rotation returns the CLK signal to the PCB While the fan is rotating 1 24 V for full speed 12 V for half seed While in constant speed rotation returns the CLK signal to the PCB While the fan is rotating 1 24 V for full speed 12 V for half speed While in constant rotation returns the CLK ...

Страница 193: ...r PCB To DC power supply PCB From DC power supply PCB From DC power supply PCB To DC power supply PCB J163 2 1 3 4 J193 2 1 1 2 PCLM1 PCLM2 J103 A1 A2 M7 J151 2 1 1 2 J191 2 1 1 2 J106 A8 A7 M8 J252 7 8 7 6 J251 A13 A14 A8 A7 J260 1 2 2 1 PTRCLM1 PTRCLM2 5V When 1 CCW rotation reverse When 1 CW rotation forward TSCLM1 TSRCLM2 When 1 CCW rotation reverse When 1 CW rotation forward When 1 CCW rotati...

Страница 194: ...8 A7 M12_B M12_B M12_A M12_A 24V J2101 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 J2104 2 5 1 3 6 4 M12 Motor driver PCB Motor driver PCB M13_B M13_B M13_A M13_A 24V M13 J268 2 5 6 4 1 3 5 2 1 3 6 4 J106 A19 A16 A15 A17 A20 A18 J251 A2 A5 A6 A4 A1 A3 A19 A16 A15 A17 A20 A18 M14_B M14_B M14_A M14_A Reversal motor 24V J2302 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 J2305 8 11 7 9 12 10 M14 Duplexing driver PCB J228 5 2 6 4 1 3 2 5 1 3 6...

Страница 195: ... 17 18 16 13 15 J414 5 2 1 3 6 4 2 5 1 4 1 3 M18_B M18_B M18_A M18_A M18 Fixing feeding relay PCB From DC power supply PCB J107 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 J2302 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 J2305 2 5 1 3 6 4 J231 5 2 6 4 3 1 2 5 1 3 4 6 J106 B17 B16 B15 B18 M19LD M19 J612 2 3 4 1 M19ON 24V 0V 0V J611 1 2 J251 B4 B5 B6 B3 B17 B16 B15 B18 J105 11 C3MLD Motor driver PCB J2108 3 J2106 1 2 J287 4 5 6 3 J282 A4 A3 A2...

Страница 196: ... B8 B9 B10 J2102 8 11 7 9 12 10 J412 5 2 6 4 1 3 2 5 1 3 6 4 Vertical path lower motor M27_B M27_B M27_A M27_A M27 Motor driver PCB J104 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 J2101 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 J2110 2 5 1 3 6 4 While in rotation alternates between 1 and 0 pulse signal While in rotation alternates between 1 and 0 pulse signal While in rotation alternates between 1 and 0 pulse signal While in rotating alte...

Страница 197: ...ust collecting roller Developing assembly Pre transfer charging Separation charging J7371 See descriptions on charging control in Chapter 4 J122 J1015 See descriptions on the controller unit See descriptions on the paper deck in Chapter 8 J123 J751 See descriptions on the shift tray in Chapter 9 grid wire primary charging wire J111 J03 J719 Paper deck accessory Shift tray accessory Controller unit...

Страница 198: ...Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 199: ...COPYRIGHT 2000 CANON INC 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000 iR6000 REV 0 JULY 2000 CHAPTER 3 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 200: ...laser beam is directed through an imaging lens and is reflected by a polygon mirror which is rotating at a high and by upon by which the beam is turned into a scanning beam possessing a specific direction The laser beam is then led through an imaging lens for removal of distortion and is di rected to the positively charged photosensitive drum areas representing white for the for mation of a static...

Страница 201: ... high speed low power and low noise operation Components Laser semiconductor Laser scanner motor M15 Polygon mirror BD mirror BD PCB Laser driver PCB DC controller PCB Description Visible laser light aboxut 660 nm 1 beam DC motor 2 speed control 12 faceted Detects a laser beam Controls laser activation Controls laser scanner motor rotation Collimator lens Imaging lens 3 Cylindrical lens BD mirror ...

Страница 202: ... power switch ON Original set ADF opened Start key ON 195 C Image leading edge signal PTOP Laser PRINT INTR INTR WMUP CNTR LSTR LSTR STBY STBY BD signal BD Laser scanner motor M15 If silence mode has been selected in user mode a switch over to half speed rotation is made after a specific period of time during in wait rotation In wait rotation In wait rotation Download Free Service Manual at http p...

Страница 203: ...nted along the path of the laser beam The CCD AP PCB reads image signals from the CCD and sends them to the controller unit The controller unit performs image processing and the signals are sent to the laser driver PCB as video signals through the DC controller PCB they are then sent to the laser unit as laser intensity control signals in sequence F03 201 01 Construction of the Control System 12 f...

Страница 204: ...nerated 5 The 2 pixel parallel signal is converted into a 1 pixel serial signal 6 The laser drive signal drives the laser in response to the video signals F03 202 01 Flow of Signals E100 It is indicated if the BD signal is not detected within a specific period of time after the laser has been turned on BD 1 J2701 J120 J1015 J122 J122 J117 J2502 J1015 GND 5V VIDEO 4 LD 6 PSYNC 3 4 3 2 1 A20 1 2 3 4...

Страница 205: ...aser activation signal Used to turn on laser light for an intensity sample for each scan 3 Laser enable signal Goes 0 when the laser becomes ready after the Start key has been pressed 4 Laser write start signal Used to start a laser write when paper reaches the laser write start sensor PS28 mounted in front of the registration roller 5 The intensity of laser light is monitored while it is turned o...

Страница 206: ...tray in re sponse to the detection of paper by the registration paper sensor PS29 J117 J113 J121 LD 1 LD DT 7 LD EN 3 LSH 2 LD 1 GND L RDY LWRPD 4 Laser driver PCB DC controller PCB J2502 6 J2501 Laser assembly Laser Intensity monitor 5 Laser drive circuit EEPROM 3 2 1 B5 20 19 18 16 15 14 12 11 10 8 7 3 2 1 17 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 10 11 13 14 18 19 20 4 4 3 2 1 GND GND GND GND GND 5V 3 3V Laser write st...

Страница 207: ... DPOT LPOWER P Indicates the result of potential control mechanism for the laser intensity during output of printer PDL images DISPLAY DPOT LPOWER C Indicates the result of the potential control mechanism for the laser intensity during output of copy images DISPLAY MISC LPOWER Indicates the laser intensity on a real time basis ADJUST LASER PVE OFST Use it to adjust the point of laser exposure FUNC...

Страница 208: ...e switching the speed 3 Laser scanner motor ready signal When 0 the laser scanner motor is rotated at a con stant speed constant speed rotation control F03 401 01 Functional Block Diagram E110 It is indicated under the following conditions 1 If the laser scanner motor ready signal LMRDY goes 1 when the motor is rotating 2 If the laser scanner motor ready signal LMRDY does not go 0 within a specifi...

Страница 209: ...ssembled by reversing the steps used to disassemble it 3 The screws must be identified by type length diameter and location 4 The mounting screw of the grounding wire and the varistors is equipped with a toothed washer to ensure electrical continuity They must not be left out when fitting the screws 5 As a rule the machine must not be operated with any of its parts removed 6 The front door switch ...

Страница 210: ... Unit 1 Open the front cover 2 Open the hopper cover 1 then re move the three screws 2 remove the connector cover 3 and disconnect the connector F03 501 01 3 Slide out the hopper unit 4 F03 501 02 4 Remove the two screws 5 and detach the toner dish 6 F03 501 03 1 2 3 4 5 6 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 211: ... 501 04 7 Disconnect the connector 11 and slide out the developing assembly 12 then detach the hopper slot 13 Disconnect the four connectors and re move the four screws 14 then slide out the scanner unit 15 F03 501 05 When replacing the scanner unit be sure to execute the fol lowing in service mode if the fixing assembly is 150 C or higher otherwise potential con trol will not be executed COPIER F...

Страница 212: ...COPYRIGHT 2000 CANON INC 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000 iR6000 REV 0 JULY 2000 CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 213: ...Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 214: ... LED Array Potential Control 1 Setting the primary current 2 Setting the laser output 3 Setting the developing bias DC 1 Primary charging wire 2 Pre transfer charging wire 3 Transfer charging wire 4 Separation charging wire DC constant current control set by potential control DC constant voltage control fixed by varistor Control value 850 V approx AC constant voltage control on off control only Vo...

Страница 215: ...ge formation system is constructed as follows F04 101 01 Developing assembly Dust collecting roller Pre transfer charging assembly Transfer guide Transfer charging assembly Separation charging assembly Cleaner unit Pre exposure Primary charging assembly Potential sensor Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 216: ...rinting Main power switch ON Control panel power switch ON Start key ON INTR WMUPR WMUP SLEEP STBY Fixing assembly temperature 195 C 200 C Drum motor M1 Pre exposure LED Primary charging Pre transfer charging bias AC Grid bias Developing clutch CL4 Developing bias AC Developing bias DC Dust collecting roller bias DC Separation charging bias DC Laser activation Main motor M2 1 2 Pre transfer chargi...

Страница 217: ...ing the drum potential 2 executes image formation 1 3 executes image formation 2 Start key ON PRINT LSTR STBY STBY INRT 2 1 3 Drum motor M1 Pre exposure LED Primary charging Pre transfer charging bias AC Grid bias Developing clutch CL4 Developing bias AC Developing bias DC Dust collecting roller bias DC Separation charging bias DC Laser activation Main motor M2 Pre transfer charging bias DC Transf...

Страница 218: ...opier printer 2 Correcting power APC i e Auto Power Control 3 Determining primary current VD control 4 Determining laser output VL control 5 Determining developing bias DC VDC control The control system related to potential control is designed as follows Primary charging wire Potential sensor Laser light Developing cylinder DC controller PCB Laser driver PCB High voltage PCB Potential control PCB ...

Страница 219: ... The potential is controlled at such times as shown below and is of the nature described 10 and 60 min after main power switch is turned on Sensitivity potential control in keeping with changes in drum temperature To suit changes in the efficiency of charg ing At the start of the first job 10 and 60 min after the main power switch is turned on OFF not executed default Reduced mode 5 sec approx Sta...

Страница 220: ... times max of VL2 once 2 Potential control for printing potential is measured as follows of VD 8 times max of VL1 8 times max of VL2 once COPIER OPTION BODY PO CNT turning on off potential control 0 potential control OFF 1 potential control ON WMUPR WMUP STBY Fixing assembly temperature 195 C 200 C Drum motor M1 Primary charging Laser Potential sensor Potential control for printing 2 Potential con...

Страница 221: ...er output and developing bias DC value are determined for copying and printing and the ratio is stored in memory When potential is controlled again after power on potential control for the preceding mode used is executed for the other the ratio obtained at power on is used The following shows the sequence of operations for reduced mode F04 201 03 Numeric constant set for control value for copying ...

Страница 222: ...TION TEMPO F POT SW 0 for text oriented users originals with low image ratio default 1 for photo oriented users originals with high image ratio 2 to prevent re transfer white spots near 50 mm of leading edge COPIER OPTION TEMPO F HUM SW Enter 1 if the environment sensor is faulty out of order Use it as an emergency remedy until the environment sensor is replaced COPIER OPTION TEMPO F HUM D It beco...

Страница 223: ...opying COPIER ADJUST V CONT VD OFST entering offset value for VD target potential for copying COPIER ADJUST V CONT DE OFS P adjusting Vdc for printing COPIER ADJUST V CONT VD OFS P entering offset value for VD target potential for printing COPIER FUNCTION DPC OFST adjusting potential sensor off set Enter the value indicated on the service label if the RAM on the DC con troller PCB has been replace...

Страница 224: ...potential of the drum against the target po tential if the measured potential is 6 V or higher than the target value the primary current is corrected and the potential is measured once again The potential is measured as many as eight times and the primary charging current is corrected as many as eight times F04 202 01 WMUPR WMUP STBY 200 C Potential sensor Primary charging Grid bias Vpc Vpc Vpc Vp...

Страница 225: ...igher the potential of the laser output is cor rected and the potential is corrected once again The potential is measured as many as eight times and the laser output is corrected as many as eight times In addition the developing bias for light area VL2 is measured under the corrective conditions used to determine the laser output LP needed for target potential F04 203 01 WMUPR WMUP STBY 200 C Pote...

Страница 226: ...Vdc 85 to 110 V The potential for printing varies in keeping with the reading of the environment sensor to ensure the reproduction of appropriate line widths F04 204 01 WMUPR WMUP STBY 200 C Potential sensor Selected potential Laser Primary charging Vpc Vpc LP0 Vpc Potential control sequence start VD VL1 VL2 Vdc VD Vdc Photosensitive drum Developing cylinder Potential sensor Primary current level ...

Страница 227: ...is obtained Based on the result an appropriate correc tive value is obtained for the laser output If measurement is not possible for some difficulty as in measuring between sheets the attempt at measurement is continued for a further 1 min Potential control for copying Potential control for printing Main power switch ON Fixing assembly temperature end of fixing assembly warm up Control panel power...

Страница 228: ... job Timing During last rotation for the first job 30 min after the laser output correction Potential measurement The drum potential shows a discrepancy around the drum periphery so that the average of potential levels is obtained Based on the result an appropriate correc tive value is obtained for the laser output COPIER OPTION BODY LAPC SW switching laser APC correc tion 0 ON executes APC if lef...

Страница 229: ... Density adjustment is executed to obtain a level of density suited to the needs of the user Correction The developing bias is corrected in keeping with the F value setting and it is also performed as part of image processing 2 6 1 Density Adjustment During Copying The developing bias is raised to decrease the copy density Too high a developing bias will result in hazy images while too low a bias ...

Страница 230: ... also executed as part of image process ing thickening 1 All may be set to yes using fine line correction in user mode T04 206 02 COPIER OPTION BODY CNT W PR turning on off variable density mode during printing 1 corrects target value to enable changing of density during printing default 0 disables changing of density during printing F value 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Developing DC bias standard value V 20...

Страница 231: ...ay to prevent adhesion of excess toner to the photosensitive drum because of residual charge and its system of control serves the following functions 1 Turning On Off the Pre Exposure LED Array F04 301 01 The system uses the following signals 1 pre exposure LED control signal when 0 LED turns on DC controller PCB Pre exposure lamp J103A 24V PEXP 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Download Free ...

Страница 232: ...tion signal 0 upon detection of an excessively high or low level of current 2 primary corona current control signal the output of the primary corona current turns ON when the voltage is about 3 V or higher or lower than 11 V it turns OFF when the level is about 12 V or higher 3 high voltage remote signal turns on off the output of primary corona current DC controller PCB High voltage PCB J102A J45...

Страница 233: ...on 2 If wire cleaning is executed in user mode 3 At the end of making 2000 prints 1 after the end of cleaning 1 Default may be changed in service mode COPIER OPTION BODY W CLN P F04 302 02 The following signals are used 1 primary charging wire cleaning motor CCW drive signal 1 when 1 the wire cleaner moves to the rear 2 primary charging wire cleaning motor CW drive signal 2 when 1 the wire cleaner...

Страница 234: ...ted on the service label if the RAM on the DC con troller PCB has been replaced COPIER FUNCTION CLEANING WIRE CLN Execute auto cleaning if five round trips the primary charging wire or the transfer charging wire has been replaced COPIER OPTION BODY W CLN P Set the intervals at which auto cleaning of the primary charging wire is ex ecuted in terms of the number of prints Download Free Service Manua...

Страница 235: ... collecting roller bias is controlled for the following 1 Turning on off the dust collecting roller bias The system used to control the dust collecting roller is constructed as follows F04 303 01 The following signal is used for the system 1 dust collecting roller bias remote signal if 1 the dust collecting roller bias turns on DC controller PCB High voltage PCB J102A DC 1000V J4502 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ...

Страница 236: ...0 when an excessively high or low level of current is detected 2 pre transfer charging control signal the output of pre transfer current turns ON when the voltage is about 3 V or more and less than 11 V it turns OFF when the voltage is about 12 V or more 3 pre transfer separating charging remote signal turns on off the output of the pre trans fer separation current DC controller PCB J510A J4502 J4...

Страница 237: ...vironment sensor F04 304 02 COPIER OPTION BODY FUZZY turning on off fuzzy control 0 fuzzy control ON default 1 low humidity mode uses a lower than standard pre transfer charging current 2 normal humidity mode 3 high humidity mode use higher than standard pre transfer charging current Setting it to 1 through 3 will make the control independent of the read ing from the environment sensor Low humidit...

Страница 238: ...ing is executed in user mode 3 At the end of last rotation for printing of each 2000 prints 1 1 Default may be changed in service mode COPIER OPTION BODY W CLN P F04 304 03 The following signals are used 1 pre transfer charging wire cleaning motor CW drive signal when 1 the wire cleaner moves to the rear 2 pre transfer charging wire cleaning motor CCW drive signal when 1 the wire moves to the fron...

Страница 239: ...ter the value indicated on the label attached to the new high voltage unit if the RAM on the DC controller PCB has been cleared or the high voltage unit has been replaced COPIER ADJUST HV TR D PRE TR entering offset value of pre transfer high voltage output of DC controller PCB Enter the value indicated on the label attached to the new DC controller PCB if the RAM on the DC controller PCB has been...

Страница 240: ...ng signals 1 transfer charging leakage detection signal 0 when an excessively high or low current is detected 2 transfer charging current control signal when about 3 V or higher and lower than 11 V the output of the transfer current turns ON when about 12 V or higher it turns OFF 3 high voltage remote signal turns on off the transfer current output DC controller PCB High voltage PCB J102A 1 2 3 4 ...

Страница 241: ...nment sensor F04 305 02 COPIER OPTION BODY FUZZY turning on off fuzzy control 0 fuzzy control ON default 1 low humidity environment mode pre transfer charging current lower than standard 2 normal humidity environment mode 3 high humidity environment mode pre transfer charging current higher than standard Setting it to 1 through 1 will make control independent of the environ ment sensor Transfer cu...

Страница 242: ... mode 3 At the end of making 2 000 prints 1 after cleaning 1 Default may be changed in service mode COPIER OPTION BODY W CLN P F04 305 03 The system uses the following signals 1 transfer charging wire cleaning motor CW drive signal when 1 the wire cleaner moves to the rear 2 transfer charging wire cleaning motor CCW drive signal when 1 the wire cleaner moves to the front DC controller PCB 8 7 20 1...

Страница 243: ...ut of the high voltage unit Enter the value indicated on the label attached to the new high voltage unit if the RAM on the DC controller PCB has been cleared or the high voltage unit has been replaced COPIER ADJUST HV TR D HV TR Use it to enter the offset value for the thermistor high voltage output of the DC controller PCB Enter the value on the label attached to the DC controller PCB if the RAM ...

Страница 244: ...tte 3 COPIER OPTON BODY TR SP C4 Use it to switch the transfer separation output value for pickup from the cassette 4 COPIER OPTION BODY TR SP MF Use it to switch the transfer separation output for pickup from the manual feed tray COPIER OPTION BODY TR SP DK Use it to switch the transfer separation output for pickup from the side pa per deck The transfer separation output value is switched for pic...

Страница 245: ...l of the drum fuzzy control The system used to control separation charging is constructed as follows F04 306 01 DC controller PCB J102A J4502 AC DC J4505 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 PT SP REMOTE 2 PT SP LEAK DETECT 1 SP CNT 3 High voltage PCB 3 2 1 High voltage AC transformer 500µA The level of current of the DC bias varies as follows in keeping wi...

Страница 246: ...n signal 0 when an excessively high or low level of current is detected 2 separation charging current control signal when about 3 V or higher and lower than 11 V the output of the separation current turns ON when about 12 V or higher it turns OFF 3 separation charging remote signal turns on off the output of the separation current Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 247: ...o make up for this 2 If the potential of the drum is low increase the output to prevent separation faults 3 If the potential of the drum is high decrease the level of current to prevent double trans fer COPIER OPTION BODY FUZZY turning on off fuzzy control 0 fuzzy control ON default 1 low humidity mode uses a lower than standard level of pre transfer charging current 2 normal humidity environment ...

Страница 248: ...CB Enter the value indicated on the new DC controller PCB if the RAM on the DC controller PCB has been cleared or the DC controller PCB has been re placed COPIER OPTION BODY TR SP C1 Use it to switch the transfer separation output value for pickup from the right deck COPIER OPTION BODY TR SP C2 Use it to switch the transfer separation output value for pickup from the left deck COPIER OPTON BODY TR...

Страница 249: ...onent parts are associated with the developing assembly F04 401 01 Feed screw Developing assembly toner sensor TS1 M1 CL1 Developing assembly clutch Developing cylinder Toner feed screw Toner feed screw M10 Angled feed screw Stirring rod Toner sensor TS2 M9 Hopper stirring motor Hopper supply motor Main motor Toner supply Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 250: ...ng Assembly The system used to control the drive of the developing assembly is constructed as follows F04 402 01 CL1 Developing assembly clutch M1 DC controller PCB M10ON 1 24V J103B 1 5 6 7 8 M9ON 2 24V M1_ON 0V M1_LCK 5V J108A 1 9 10 11 12 DEVCD 3 24V J108B 1 2 M10 M9 Hopper stirring motor Hopper supply motor Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 251: ...llowing signals are used 1 hopper stirring motor drive signal when 0 the motor rotates to stir the toner 2 hopper supply motor drive signal when 0 the motor rotates to supply toner 3 developing assembly clutch drive signal when 0 the developing assembly clutch turns on Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 252: ...l if about 3 V or higher and lower than 11 V the output of developing DC bias current turns ON if about 12 V or higher it turns OFF 2 developing DC bias remote signal turns on off the output of developing DC bias cur rent DC controller PCB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 DEV AC REMOTE 2 DEV DC CNT 1 Developing cylinder J4504 600V Image area Non image a...

Страница 253: ... on the DC controller PCB has been cleared or the DC controller PCB has been replaced from 100 to obtain lighter images to 100 to obtain darker images COPIER ADJUST DEVELOP D HV DE Use it to enter the offset value for the output of developing high voltage of the DC controller PCB Enter the value indicated on the label attached to the DC controller PCB if the RAM on the DC controller PCB has been c...

Страница 254: ...mponent parts are associated with the toner supply system F04 404 01 The following signals are used 1 developing assembly toner level detection signal when the absence of toner is detected 0 2 hopper toner level detection signal when the absence of toner is detected 0 TS2 TS1 DC controller PCB 1 7 8 9 J103A TEP 2 0V DTEP 1 5V 5V 0V 1 9 10 11 J103B Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blog...

Страница 255: ...or more The level of toner inside the hopper is monitored by the hopper toner sensor while toner is supplied by the hopper motor or toner is being stirred When the toner inside the hopper drops below a specific level the hopper toner level de tection signal goes 0 When the DC controller PCB detects the signal for 1 9 sec or more the machine will indicate the Add Toner message on its control panel ...

Страница 256: ...RMATION SYSTEM 4 43 P 5 Drum Cleaner Unit 5 1 Outline The following component parts are associated with the drum cleaner unit F04 501 01 Pre exposure lamp LED Cleaning blade Separation claw Magnet roller Auxiliary roller Waste toner feedscrew Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 257: ...g the Waste Toner The system used to detect waste toner full condition is constructed as follows F04 502 01 DC controller PCB Waste toner bottle front J108A J107 M1_ON M1_LCK 0V WT RCK 5V 0V 1 10 9 11 12 1 17 18 M1 Main motor To MSW1 Waste toner feedscrew lock detection MSW1 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 258: ...MATION SYSTEM 4 45 P E013 waste toner lock It is indicated when the waste toner lock sensor MSW2 remains on for 4 sec or more Memo The waste toner bottle is capable of holding as much toner as may be used for a maximum of about 500 000 prints Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 259: ...drive control signal when 1 AC power is supplied to the drum heater control PCB 2 thermistor temperature detection signal feeds voltage of a level suited to the detected temperature DC controller PCB AC driver PCB Drum heater control PCB 1 2 3 4 5 6 J2002 W1 W2 2 J2053 J102B J2053 J2052 Environment switch SW3 Controlled to 43 C 0V HT TEMP 2 AC DRUM HT ON 1 Drum heater H3 Thermistor 3 1 7 8 9 10 11...

Страница 260: ... mode Environment sensor SW3 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Drum heater H3 Half wave OFF Full wave Full wave Halfwave fullwaveif120 230V Halfwave fullwaveif120 230V Halfwave fullwaveif120 230V Halfwave fullwaveif120 230V Full wave Full wave Full wave Full wave Main motor M2 OFF Main motor M2 ON Turning On Off the Drum Heater Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 261: ...er control PCB may be turned on to change from 43 C to 47 C default OFF control at 43 C If the switch is turned on controlled to 47 C in a low temperature humidity environment little moisture in the air however printing of halftone images can cause fusion requiring the operation of the switch to suit the environment as follows 1 Remove the drum heater control PCB See p 4 51P 2 Shift SW2001 1 on th...

Страница 262: ...assembled by reversing the steps used to disassemble it 3 The screws must be identified by type length diameter and location 4 The mounting screw of the grounding wire and the varistors is equipped with a toothed washer to ensure electrical continuity They must not be left out when fitting the screws 5 As a rule the machine must not be operated with any of its parts removed 6 The front door switch...

Страница 263: ...r unit to draw out the fixing feed ing unit 2 Take out the process unit See p 4 54P 3 Remove the primary charging assembly 4 Remove the potential sensor unit 5 Remove the two mounting screws 1 and remove the potential sensor rail stay 2 6 Disconnect the connector 3 and re move the two mounting screws 4 then detach the pre exposure lamp unit 5 F04 701 01 F04 701 02 1 1 2 3 4 5 Download Free Service...

Страница 264: ...e process unit or the photosensitive drum in an area sub ject to the direct rays of the sun 3 Do not place the process unit or the photosensitive drum in an area sub ject to high or low temperature or humidity or where temperature or hu midity tend to fluctuate rapidly 4 Do not place the process unit or the photosensitive drum in an area sub ject to dust ammonium gas or organic solvent gas The for...

Страница 265: ... at the rear and the gear at the front of the drum need not be removed F04 702 03 If the temperature of the fixing assembly is 150 C or higher when replacing the drum unit be sure to execute the following in service mode otherwise po tential control will not be ex ecuted COPIER FUNCTION DPC DPC 7 2 2 Replacing the Drum Heater 1 Remove the photosensitive drum from the process unit 2 Remove the two ...

Страница 266: ...tach the drum heater 5 from the photo sensitive drum F04 702 05 7 2 3 Mounting the Photosensitive Drum Mount the photosensitive drum by reversing the steps used to remove it however be sure not to soil or scratche the drum and not to trap the cable of the drum heater 7 2 4 Setting the DIP Switch for the Drum Heater Control PCB 1 Remove the drum heater assembly See p 4 52P 2 Disconnect the connecto...

Страница 267: ...r 2 Remove the developing assembly See p 4 73P 3 Remove the hopper assembly See p 4 78P 4 Remove the primary charging cooling fan 5 Slide out the fixing feeding assembly and place the drum protective sheet 1 on the registration roller assembly 6 Disconnect the four connectors 2 and remove the two mounting screws 3 F04 703 01 2 3 3 1 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 268: ...e drum fixing screw If the drum is let to rotate coun terclockwise the cleaning blade will not come into contact with the drum correctly leading to cleaning faults Be sure to fix the drum in place first before removing the drum fixing screw to avoid the problem F04 703 02 REF If the hopper assembly is re leased but not removed be sure to open the right upper door and the right lower door so that t...

Страница 269: ... left rail place the process rail along the guide plate 1 at the front rear of the rail On the right rail 2 place the process unit on the L shaped stay F04 703 05 2 After sliding the process unit into the machine match the slot in the drum shaft and the slot in the drum using the drum rotating tool 3 Then insert the drum fixing tool 4 and fit the mount ing screw 5 into the center opening of the dr...

Страница 270: ...me time 1 Open the front cover and slide out the hopper unit 2 Remove the developing assembly and the primary cooling fan 3 Disconnect the connector 1 and re move the screw 2 then detach the po tential sensor assembly 3 F04 704 01 4 Remove the three screws 4 and detach the front door switch cover 5 F04 704 02 5 Free the cable 6 from the cable guide 6 Remove the six screws 7 and detach the door swi...

Страница 271: ...TION SYSTEM 4 58 P 7 Remove the two screws 9 and detach the potential control PCB together with the mounting base 10 F04 704 04 8 Remove the four screws 11 and three connectors 12 and detach the poten tial control PCB 13 F04 704 05 9 10 11 13 12 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 272: ...3 Connect the connector of the potential sensor to the connector of the machine 4 Fit the potential checking electrode FY9 3012 2 to the potential sensor 1 F04 704 06 When fitting the checking elec trode to the potential sensor 2 be sure that the magnet of the checking electrode does not come into contact with the po tential sensor cover 5 Connect the clip 3 of the checking electrode to the frame ...

Страница 273: ...ervice mode COPIER FUNCTION DPC OFST 9 Record the setting of OFST on the service label 10 Start service mode and set 1 to the following to enable potential control COPIER OPTION BODY PO CNT 11 Check to make sure that the data lamp in the control panel is off then turn off the main power switch 12 Disconnect the power plug from the power outlet 13 Remove the checking electrode from the potential se...

Страница 274: ...and slide up the fixing member 2 to secure the fixing member in place 3 Disconnect the connector 3 and re move the primary charging assembly 4 F04 705 01 If you have replaced the primary charging wire or the primary charging assembly be sure to execute the following in service mode to clean the wire COPIER FUNCTION CLEANING WIRE CLN Further be user to use a strengthened polishing pad blue holder a...

Страница 275: ... the hopper assembly 2 Remove the mounting screw 1 and disconnect the connector 2 then de tach the pre transfer assembly 3 F04 706 01 When you have mounted the pre transfer charging assembly be sure to execute wire clean ing in user mode If the sur face temperature of the fixing upper roller is 100 C or lower you need not execute this as the wire will be cleaned automati cally 1 3 2 Download Free ...

Страница 276: ... 707 01 4 Disconnect the connector 3 and slide out the transfer separation charging as sembly 4 to the front then detach it by pulling it up at an angle F04 707 02 7 7 2 Mounting the Transfer Separation Charging Assembly Mount the transfer separation charging assembly by reversing the steps used to remove it while keeping the following in mind 1 Make sure that the four protrusions 1 on the transfe...

Страница 277: ... 2 Make sure that the leaf spring 3 of the fixing feeding unit comes in contact with the frame of the transfer separation charging assembly slide from the front F04 707 04 F04 707 05 3 Mount the fixing guide plate 4 with a mounting screw 5 F04 707 06 2 3 2 2 4 5 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 278: ... clean the wire COPIER FUNCTION CLEANING WIRE CLN If you have replaced the separation charging wire or the separation charging assembly be sure to execute wire cleaning in user mode If the surface temperature of the fixing upper roller is 100 C or lower you need not execute this mode as the wire will be cleaned automatically Further be sure to use a strengthened polishing pad blue holder as the cl...

Страница 279: ...r charging assembly 7 8 2 Removing the Wire Cleaner of the Primary Charging Assembly 1 Pick the wire cleaner and disengage the hook with a flat blade screwdriver F04 708 01 7 8 3 Routing the Charging Wire All charging wires except the grid wire are routed more or less in the same way the fol lowing cites the primary charging assembly 1 Remove the shielding plate left right of the charging assembly...

Страница 280: ... wind the charg ing wire around a hex key once and turn the hex key three to four times then twist the charg ing wire 4 Cut the end excess of the twisted charging wire 5 Hook the loop on the stud F04 708 03 6 At the rear hook the charging wire on the charging wire positioner then hook the charging wire tension spring on the charging wire where indicated to F04 708 04 F04 708 04 Charging electrode ...

Страница 281: ...llowing The charging wire must not be bent or twisted The charging wire must be fitted in the V groove of the charging wire positioner F04 708 06 9 Attach a cushoin in front of the charg ing wire This does not apply to the primary charging assembly 10 Mount the shielding plate left right For other charging assemblies mount the two lids 11 Mount the wire cleaner At this time pay attention to make s...

Страница 282: ...about 5 cm of charging wire from the charging wire reel 0 1 mm in diameter and form a loop at its end with a diameter of about 2 mm F04 708 08 REF To form a loop wind the charg ing wire around a hex key once and turn the hex key three to four times then twist the charg ing wire 5 Cut the twisted charging wire excess with nippers 6 Hook the loop on stud A 7 After routing the wire for 31 runs lead i...

Страница 283: ...tion to avoid defor mation slack of the charging assembly as by tightening the mounting screw found on the front of the left right shielding plate early 10 Tighten the mounting screws loosened in steps 1 and 2 11 Wipe the grid wire with lint free paper moistened with alcohol 1 Check to make sure that the grid wire is free of bending and twisting 2 Be sure that the runs are laid at equal intervals ...

Страница 284: ...ansfer charging wire may be adjusted by turning the screw found at the back of the charg ing assembly a single turn changes the position of the charging wire by about 0 7 mm Charging assembly Height of charging wire Tolerance Primary Pre transfer 2mm Transfer Separation A B C D 7 5 1 5 0 mm 9 5 0 5mm 14 9 0 5mm 1mm 2mm 7 5 1 5 0 mm 10 06 0 3 mm No height adjusting mechanism 16 0 0 5mm Download Fre...

Страница 285: ...imary Anti Stray Sheet 1 Open the front cover 2 Remove the developing assembly 3 Remove the hopper assembly 4 Remove the process unit See p 4 54P 5 Remove the two screws 1 and remove the potential sensor rail stay 2 F04 708 10 6 Clean the primary anti stray sheet 3 F04 708 11 1 2 1 3 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 286: ...g as sembly locking assembly The toner collecting in the path from the hopper to the developing as sembly can start to move astray because of the vibration occur ring during inspection or repair work 7 9 1 Removing the Developing Assembly from the Machine 1 Open the right upper cover and remove the mounting screw then detach the door stopper tape 2 Remove the mounting screw 1 and push the developi...

Страница 287: ... assembly cover 2 F04 709 03 3 Place a newspaper on the floor or a desk and pour out the toner onto the newspaper from the developing assem bly 4 Remove the two mounting screws 3 and detach the blade unit 4 together with its mounting base F04 709 04 The blade must be mounted with a high accuracy Do not remove it on its own in the field i e be sure to remove it intact with its mounting base 1 2 1 3...

Страница 288: ...irst to protect the developing cylinder 7 9 4 Removing the Developing Cylinder Magnetic Seal 1 Remove the developing assembly from the machine 2 Remove the blade unit 3 Remove the two mounting screws 1 and detach the gear unit 2 together with the gear F04 709 05 When removing the gear unit be sure to take care as the gear attached to the screw will be come free 4 Remove the grip ring 3 mounted to ...

Страница 289: ...wo mounting screws 7 and detach the electrode plate 8 F04 709 07 6 Remove the mounting screw 9 and detach the magnetic positioning plate 10 F04 709 08 7 Remove the grip ring 11 mounted to the cylinder shaft at the front and de tach the push on roll 12 F04 709 09 8 7 10 9 11 12 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 290: ... bearing 15 at the front and the rear and detach the developing cylinder 16 F04 709 11 Do not leave fingerprints or oils on the surface of the developing cylinder Otherwise dry wipe it with lint free paper Do not use solvent 7 9 5 Cleaning the Developing Anti Stray Sheet 1 Remove the developing assembly and clean the developing anti stray sheet 1 F04 709 12 13 14 13 15 16 15 1 Download Free Servic...

Страница 291: ...AGE FORMATION SYSTEM 4 78 P 7 10 Hopper Assembly 7 10 1 Removing the Hopper Assembly from the Machine 1 Slide out the hopper assembly to the front See p 3 11P 2 Remove the mounting screw 1 and detach the hopper assembly 2 F04 710 01 1 2 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 292: ...unit from the ma chine See p 4 54P 2 Remove the primary charging assembly 3 Disconnect the connector 1 of the AC line of the drum heater 4 Remove the four mounting screws 2 and detach the cleaning blade assembly 3 F04 711 02 5 Remove the E ring 4 from under the cleaning blade assembly and detach the pressure spring 5 F04 711 03 Cleaning blade Separation claw 1 2 3 5 4 Download Free Service Manual ...

Страница 293: ... F04 711 04 7 Loosen the five mounting screws 9 and detach the blade support plate from the cleaning blade F04 711 05 7 11 3 Mounting the Cleaning Blade When mounting the cleaning blade be sure that the side with the marking 1 will be the face 1 Push in the cleaning blade 2 until it butts slightly again the rear F04 711 06 No gap Blade retaining plate 2 1 9 6 7 8 Download Free Service Manual at ht...

Страница 294: ...ed lightly in step 2 about 20 to 30 in the order indi cated tightening them fully F04 711 07 After mounting the cleaning blade check to make sure that the edge of the blade is not ap preciably bent Further be sure to clean the groove in the blade support plate before mounting the blade as toner or the like in the groove can start to bend the blade Order of tightening 5 2 3 1 2 4 Download Free Serv...

Страница 295: ...hen make sure that the inner end of the side seal is within the area 3 of the washer When replacing the side seal 1 at the rear push the magnet roller 2 toward the front and then make sure that the inner end of the side seal is within the area 3 of the washer 2 The bottom end of each side seal 1 must be 0 to 0 5 mm from the corner of the cleaner hosing i e point of refer ence 3 3 Attach the side s...

Страница 296: ...oller using tweezers or the like 3 Remove the toner from the surface of the magnet roller Roll copy paper into a U to scoop it up F04 711 09 F04 711 10 4 Turn the magnet roller clockwise viewing from the front 5 Repeat steps 3 through 5 until the area from which toner was removed in step 3 is once again coated with an even layer of toner 4 to 8mm A Toner guide roller Side scraper front Remove wast...

Страница 297: ...embly 7 12 1 Removing from the Drum Unit 1 Remove the process unit from the ma chine See p 4 54P F04 712 01 1 Take care not to break the separation claw 2 Take care not to damage the photosensitive drum 2 Remove the screw 1 and detach the cover 2 3 Remove the two screws 3 and detach the claw holder 4 2 1 4 3 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 298: ...COPYRIGHT 2000 CANON INC 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000 iR6000 REV 0 JULY 2000 CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 299: ...Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 300: ...lated mechanical adjustment T05 101 01 1500 sheets each of 80 g m2 550 sheets each of 80 m2 50 sheets 80 g m2 By service person By user By user By service person By user Center Paper deck right left Front cassette 3 4 Manual feed tray Paper deck left right Front cassette 3 Front cassette 4 100 V model Front cassette 4 120 230 V model Manual feed tray Through path Cassette auto selection on off Pap...

Страница 301: ... roller Pickup vertical path 2 roller Pickup vertical path 3 roller Pickup vertical path 4 roller Duplexing assembly outlet roller Pull out roller Duplexing feed right roller Reversal roller Internal delivery roller External delivery roller Delivery auxiliary roller Registration roller Multifeeder pull out roller PS31 PS34 Fixing upper roller Duplexing feed left roller Curling roller PS28 Separati...

Страница 302: ...sensor Cassette 3 retry sensor Cassette 4 retry sensor Manual feed paper sensor Vertical path 1 paper sensor Vertical path 2 paper sensor Vertical path 3 paper sensor Vertical path 4 paper sensor Laser write start sensor Registration paper sensor Duplexing pre registration sensor Duplexing horizontal registration sensor Right deck feed paper sensor Left deck feed paper sensor Duplexing paper senso...

Страница 303: ...e signal RGCD J104 B Vertical path duplexing motor drive signal J115 B13 Left deck pull out clutch signal LDCLD J107 A16 Left deck feed paper detection signal LDPFS J104A Left deck pickup motor J102 B6 Left deck pickup solenoid drive signal LDPUSD J115 11A Left deck retry signal LDRT J115 A5 Left deck lifter detection signal LDLTP J115 A8 Left deck paper detection signal LDPD J105 12 Left deck lif...

Страница 304: ...wer motor drive signal J104A Cassette 3 4 pickup motor drive signal J110 A17 Cassette 3 pickup solenoid drive signal C3PUSD Cassette 3 lifter detection signal C3LTP J110 A5 Cassette 3 paper detection signal C3PD J110 B14 Vertical path 4 paper detection signal VP4PD J110 B8 Cassette 4 retry signal C4RTD J110 B17 Cassette 4 pickup solenoid drive signal C4PUSD J110 B2 Cassette 4 lifter detection sign...

Страница 305: ...24 turns on and the pickup roller rotates to feed paper The pickup solenoid SL3 SL4 SL6 SL7 turns and the pickup roller moves away from the paper The feed roller and the separation roller make sure that only one sheet of paper is moved farther to the paper path The sheet of paper moves through the vertical path assembly and reaches the registration roller The pickup motor M11 M12 M24 is a stepping...

Страница 306: ...p 2nd sheet pickup Main motor M2 INTR PRINT LSTR STBY STBY 1 Rests to arch against the registration roller Right deck pickup solenoid SL6 Right deck pickup motor M11 Right deck retry sensor PS19 Vertical path duplexing feeding motor M25 Pre registration motor M17 Vertical path roller 1 paper sensor PS24 Laser write start sensor PS28 Registration paper sensor PS29 Registration roller clutch CL2 1 1...

Страница 307: ...th duplexing feeding motor M25 Pre registration motor M17 Vertical path 1 paper sensor PS24 Vertical path lower motor M27 Vertical path upper motor M26 Start key ON or PRINT command received 1st sheet pickup 2nd sheet pickup Laser write start sensor PS28 Registration paper sensor PS29 Registration roller clutch CL2 Main motor M2 INTR PRINT LSTR STBY STBY 1 Rests to arch against the registration ro...

Страница 308: ... detected once again after a retry the machine will indicate the Jam message in its control panel The following is the sequence of retry operations F05 201 06 F05 201 05 SL M Retry sensor Pickup motor Pickup roller Pickup roller DOWN solenoid Pickup roller Retry sensor 1 Vertical path sensor Retry started Delay detected 1 Period of detection determined by the clock pulses from the motor Thereafter...

Страница 309: ...10 P 2 1 4 Others The following is used to switch the temperature control mechanism for the fixing heater to use thick paper sequence when a specific source is selected COPIER OPTION CST C1 DWSW C1 front deck right COPIER OPTION CST C2 DWSW C2 front deck left Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 310: ...sed detection Lifter position detection Paper detection Paper level de tection Lifter UP lim iter Drive motor Right deck Right deck open closed sensor PS5 Right deck lifter sensor PS6 Right deck pa per sensor PS7 Right deck pa per level upper sensor PS47 Right deck pa per level lower sensor PS48 Right deck limit sensor PS8 Right deck lifter motor M5 Left deck Left deck open closed sensor PS9 Left ...

Страница 311: ...05 202 01 Paper sensor Feed rollers Separation rollers Lifter Paper Deck open closed sensor Pickup roller Pickup roller retry sensor Lifter position lever Limit sensor Lifter sensor Paper detecting lever Paper sensor Feed rollers Separation roller Lifter Lifter sensor Cassette open closed sensor Paper Pickup roller Pickup roller retry sensor Cassette Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 b...

Страница 312: ...be sent to the DC controller PCB to cut the drive signal thereby stopping the lifter motor The following is a block diagram of the control circuit F05 202 03 M5 Motor driver PCB CPU Right deck limit sensor PS8 DC controller PCB Motor drive signal 5 6 B8 J112 J2105 Right deck lifter limit signal RDEL 1 J2108 13 J105 Right deck lifter sensor PS6 Right deck lifter detection signal RDLTP A2 J112 Limit...

Страница 313: ...s Absent F05 202 04 F05 202 05 2 2 4 Detecting the Level of Paper a Outline The machine indicates the level of paper in the deck or the cassette on the control panel in four levels including absence Paper sensor Paper detecting lever Paper Lifter Paper sensor Paper detecting lever Lifter F05 202 06 T05 202 02 3 bars 2 bars 1 bar No bar 100 to about 50 of capacity 50 to about 10 of capacity 10 or l...

Страница 314: ... of paper is detected by an exclusive sensor See 2 2 3 Detecting the Pres ence Absence of Paper F05 202 07 Right deck Left deck 1 2 1 2 Paper level Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor PS47 PS48 PS7 PS49 PS50 PS11 100 to about 50 ON ON ON ON ON ON about 50 to about 10 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON about 10 or less OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON absent OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Paper level 100 to about 50 Paper le...

Страница 315: ...junction with the movement of the lifter drive shaft F05 202 08 COPIER ADJUST CST ADJ C3 LVOL when 50 sheets exist in the cassette 3 COPIER ADJUST CST ADJ C3 HVOL when 275 sheets exist in the cassette 3 COPIER ADJUST ST ADJ C4 LVOL when 50 sheets exist in the cassette 4 COPIER ADJUST CST ADJ C4 HVOL when 275 sheets exist in the cassette 4 Paper level high Paper level low Variable resistor Variable...

Страница 316: ...er the paper size sensor is activated by the boss on the cassette enabling the identification of paper width and length Based on the width and the length the DC controller identifies the size of the paper and sends the result to the controller unit and the reader unit The boss used to press the paper size sensor operates in conjunction with the guide plate inside the plate i e its position is dete...

Страница 317: ...ssette 4 can be configured as follows 1 Changing the position of the paper size guide plate inside the cassette 2 Registering the new paper size in silence mode COPIER OPTION CST P SZ C4 cassette 4 paper size Cassette 3 Cassette 4 1 Paper length detection SV2 2 photointerrupters SV1 2 photointerrupters Paper width detection SVR4 SVR5 Paper width detecting VR Paper length sensor unit Width guide re...

Страница 318: ...n markings from A through M as shown below These markings can help determine whether the correct paper width is selected as when the user reports skew movement of paper Note that this information is not disclosed to the user Marking Paper name Remarks A STMT R B A5 R C B5 R D KLGL R E GLTR R F G LGL U3 G A4 R H LGL LTR R I FLSC U2 J B4 B5 K G LTR U1 L 279 4 431 8mm U4 11 17 LTR M A3 A4 T05 203 02 ...

Страница 319: ...OFFI A OFFI M OFI G LGL FOLIO AUS FLS LTR A LTR T05 203 03 PS102 PS104 SZ 2 0 2 3 4 Paper Sizes The DC controller PCB identifies the size of paper based on inputs of paper width and length as shown in the following table and sends the result of identification to the controller unit The paper sizes in the following table are selected from specific groups The asterisk indicates a factory setting T05...

Страница 320: ... value for STMTR in the cassette 3 COPIER ADJUST CST ADJ C3 A4R Used to adjust the paper width basic value for A4R in the cassette 3 COPIER CST ADJ C4 STMTR Used to adjust the paper width basic value for STMTR in the cassette 4 COPIER ADJUST CST ADJ C4 A4R Used to adjust the paper width basic value for A4 in the cassette 4 COPIER OPTION BODY C1 DWSW Used to switch the fixing temperature control me...

Страница 321: ...A4 A5 A5R B4 B5R B5 11 17 LTRR LTR STMT STMTR LGL K LGL K LGLR FLSC A FLS OFI E OFI B OFI A LTR A LTRR G LTR G LTRR A LGL G LGL FOLI A OFI Size vertical x horizontal mm 297 1 420 1 210 1 297 1 297 1 210 1 210 1 148 5 1 148 5 1 210 1 257 1 364 1 182 1 257 1 257 1 182 1 279 1 432 1 216 1 279 1 279 1 216 1 216 1 139 5 1 139 5 1 216 1 216 1 356 1 265 1 190 1 190 1 265 1 216 1 330 1 206 1 337 1 216 1 3...

Страница 322: ...ws the gear of the feed roller to receive the drive of the main motor so that the feed roller makes a single rotation to move paper The paper is moved as far as the registration roller by the work of the manual feed pull off roller while the feed roller rotates F05 204 01 M1 CL2 CL3 SL2 Registration roller clutch drive signal RGCD J106 A6 Manual feed pickup clutch drive signal MFPCD J108 B4 Main m...

Страница 323: ...e laser and the length of paper is detected when the manual feed tray is used with reference to the period of time during which the pre registration paper sensor PS23 remains on The paper width basic value must always be entered newly whenever the variable resistor has been replaced F05 204 02 COPIER ADJUST CST ADJ MF A4R Used to enter the paper width basic value for A4R for the manual feed tray C...

Страница 324: ...stration clutch is controlled so that print paper and the image on the drum match at a specific point and the timing at which it is turned on may be adjusted in service mode ADJUST FEED ADJ REGIST 3 2 Control System F05 302 01 CL2 J106 A6 Registration rollers Main motor Registration drive signal RGCD DC controller PCB M2 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 325: ...per Delivery flapper PS29 M14 SL8 SL5 Reversing flapper solenoid drive signal RVFSD2 J107 B11 Delivery assembly jam detection signal DSJAM J106 B2 Delivery flapper solenoid drive signal RIVFS D1 J106 A14 Internal delivery sensor drive signal IDS J106 B1 Claw jam detection signal CJAM J106 B19 Reversal detection signal 2 RVS2 J107 B16 Registration paper detection signal RGPD J106 A9 Reversal motor ...

Страница 326: ... RVFSD2 J107 B15 Reversal detection signal 1 RVS1 J107B Reversal motor drive signal J107 B16 Reversal detection signal 2 RVS2 J107A Duplexing feeding left motor drive signal J107 B12 Duplexing horizontal registration signal DSRGPD J107 B14 Duplexing feeding right motor drive signal DPDS J107A Duplexing feeding right motor drive signal J107 B13 Duplexing pre registration paper detection signal DGRF...

Страница 327: ...he paper to the duplexing reversing assembly When the paper moves past the reversal sensor 2 PS38 and reaches a specific point the reversal motor M19 stops to rotate holding the paper in wait in the reversing assembly When the reversal motor M14 starts to rotate once again in reverse this time the paper in the reversing assembly is moved to the duplexing wait position by the work of the duplexing ...

Страница 328: ... Claw jam sensor PS4 Delivery flapper solenoid SL5 Reversal motor M14 Duplexing feed left motor M29 Duplexing feed right motor M18 Vertical path duplexing feed motor M25 Duplexing pre registration sensor PS30 Duplexing paper sensor PS34 Reversal sensor 1 S37 Reversal sensor 2 PS38 Reversal flapper solenoid SL8 Internal delivery sensor PS35 yyyy yyyy 1 1 stops to arch against the duplexing feed rig...

Страница 329: ... reversing flapper The machine is capable of reordering page images in its memory eliminating the need to print according to the order of originals as a result it need not hold paper as long as other models would speeding up double sided printing As many as two sheets of paper may exist between the registration sensor and the duplexing paper sensor at a time COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ADJ REFE Use it ...

Страница 330: ...e set of duplexing prints of 10 originals 1 The 1st sheet is picked from the deck 2 The 1st side is printed on the 1st sheet The 2nd sheet is picked up 4 The 1st sheet is moved to the duplexing feeding assembly 3 The 3rd side is printed on the 2nd sheet The 1st sheet is moved to the reversing assembly The 3rd sheet is picked up F05 403 01 1 3 1 3 1 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blo...

Страница 331: ...he 5th side is printed on the 3rd sheet 6 The 1st sheet is repicked from duplexing wait position The 2nd sheet is moved to the duplexing feeding assembly 8 The 7th side is printed on the 4th sheet and the 1st sheet is delivered 7 The 2nd side is printed on the 1st sheet The 2nd sheet is moved to duplexing wait position The 4th sheet is picked up 5 3 1 1 5 3 5 3 1 2 7 2 5 3 1 Download Free Service ...

Страница 332: ...et is held in wait in duplexing wait position The 5th sheet is picked up 10 The 2nd sheet is delivered The 9th side is printed on the 5th sheet 12 The 3rd sheet is delivered 11 The 6th side is printed on the 3rd sheet The 4th sheet is held in wait in duplexing wait position 5 2 1 7 4 3 2 1 4 3 9 5 7 6 5 9 7 4 3 2 1 6 5 7 4 3 2 1 9 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 333: ...P FEEDING SYSTEM 5 34 P 13 The 8th side is printed on the 4th sheet 14 The 4th sheet is delivered and the 10th side is printed on the 5th side 15 The 5th sheet is delivered 8 7 9 4 3 6 5 2 1 8 9 7 4 3 6 5 2 1 10 9 6 5 8 7 2 1 4 3 F05 403 04 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 334: ...uplexing paper sensor PS34 turns on Drive from the duplexing horizontal registration motor M16 Position measured with reference to pulses from the duplexing horizontal registration motor 1 pulse 0 16 mm approx Related service mode COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ADJ REFE Related error code E051 home position not detected within specific time T05 404 01 F05 404 01 M16 PS31 Home position Detection start posi...

Страница 335: ...he position of the slide guide of the manual feed tray and the size of the cassette being used when the registration sensor turns on The detection of paper is done with reference to the start position and the discrepancy be tween the start position and the actual position of the paper is identified with reference to the number of pulses a signal pulse being about 0 16 mm generated by the motor 1 W...

Страница 336: ...tion Motor error Jam Same as above Same as above Same as above Same as above Same as above Same as above Same as above Same as above Same as above Error code indi cation E051 Motor error Jam Motor driver M12 A7 A8 J104 4 5 6 3 2 1 J2104 DC controller PCB CPU IC5025 A A B B 24V 24V A9 A10 A14 A10 A13 J2101 A12 A9 A11 24V 5 Controlling the Pickup Assembly 5 1 Pickup Assembly Motors The pickup assemb...

Страница 337: ...elivery sensor PS35 turns on and the paper is moved over a specific distance then the reversal mo tor M14 turns on to stop the paper when its trailing edge turns on the re versal sensor 1 PS37 F05 601 02 Method of delivery Face up Face down Mode of operation Prints multiple copies of a single original In manual feed mode when a default size is selected while the selected paper type is not plain pa...

Страница 338: ...the paper moves past the reversing roller The fixing mo tor M19 rotates and the paper is de livered by the work of the external de livery roller F05 601 04 PS37 PS46 M14 Reversing flapper Point of reversal PS37 PS36 M19 M14 Reversing flapper External delivery roller Point of reversal PS37 COPIER OPTION BODY TPR DECL switching delivery path to improve stacking for delivering thick paper in face dow...

Страница 339: ... cassette heater switch SW4 serves to supply power to the heater through the AC line or to deprive it of power If the environment switch SW3 is off the heater will not be supplied with power through the AC line even if the cassette heater switch SW4 remains on H4 RL1 AC driver PCB Cassette heater SW1 Main power switch SW3 Environment switch DC power supply PCB 2 1 J4001 DC controller PCB 4 3 J119 ...

Страница 340: ...eater H4 OFF OFF Standby front cover open During printing OFF OFF In power save mode ON ON OFF OFF Main power switch SW1 T05 700 02 T05 700 01 The cassette heater H4 used for the 230 V model operates as follows assuming that the environment switch SW3 remains on ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF Cassette heater switch SW4 Cassette heater H4 OFF OFF Standby front cover open During printing OFF ON In power ...

Страница 341: ...000 CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 42 P 8 Detecting Jams 8 1 Outline 8 1 1 Arrangement of Jam Sensors F05 801 01 PS36 PS38 PS37 PS33 PS20 PS25 PS24 PS19 PS35 PS29 PS32 PS21 PS26 PS22 PS27 PS30 PS4 PS46 PS31PS34 PS28 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 342: ...paper sensor PS27 Laser write start sensor PS28 Registration paper sensor PS29 Claw jam sensor PS4 Internal delivery sensor PS35 External delivery sensor PS36 Reversal sensor 1 PS37 Reversal sensor 2 PS38 Duplexing paper sensor PS34 Duplexing pre registration sensor PS30 Delivery assembly jam sensor PS46 Delay jam Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Statio...

Страница 343: ... ter the motor turns on F05 802 01 T05 802 01 Start key ON or PRINT set INTR PRINT Motor N 1 Jam check Sensor N 1 Normal Error 1 1 specific feed period Pickup assembly Right deck Left deck Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Motor N 1 Right deck pickup motor M11 Left deck pickup motor M24 Cassette 3 4 pickup motor M12 Cassette 3 4 pickup motor M12 DelSzzay sensor N Right deck retry sensor PS19 Left deck retry s...

Страница 344: ...aser write start sensor PS28 Registration paper sensor PS29 Internal delivery sensor PS35 External delivery sensor PS36 External delivery sensor PS36 Reversal sensor 1 PS37 Reversal sensor 2 PS38 Duplexing paper sensor PS34 Duplexing pre registration sensor PS30 F05 802 02 Start key ON or PRINT set INTR PRINT Sensor N 1 Jam check Sensor N Normal Error 1 1 1 specific feed period Sensor N 1 Right de...

Страница 345: ...sor Registration paper sensor Claw jam sensor Internal delivery sensor External delivery sensor Reversal sensor 1 Reversal sensor 2 Duplexing paper sensor Duplexing pre registration sensor T05 802 03 b Stationary Jam at Power On A stationary jam at power on is identified in reference to the presence absence of paper over a specific sensor about 1 sec after the control panel power switch is turned ...

Страница 346: ...t occur inside it and allows a check in service mode COPIER DISPALY JAM Use it to display jam data COPIER FUNCTION JAM HIST Use it to clear the jam history The machine remembers the following in the event of a jam and will resume operation using the data after removal of the jam Remaining number of copies Copying mode Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 347: ...assembled by reversing the steps used to disassemble it 3 The screws must be identified by type length diameter and location 4 The mounting screw of the grounding wire and the varistors is equipped with a toothed washer to ensure electrical continuity They must not be left out when fitting the screws 5 As a rule the machine must not be operated with any of its parts removed 6 The front door switch...

Страница 348: ...9 1 1 Removing the Right Upper Cover 1 Remove the two screws 1 and detach the cover 2 F05 901 01 2 Disconnect the connector 3 and de tach the right upper cover 4 F05 901 02 9 1 2 Opening of the Right Upper Cover 1 Open the right upper cover and remove the mounting screw 1 F05 901 03 2 1 3 4 1 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 349: ... roller unit F05 901 04 9 1 4 Removing the Feeding Roller 1 Open the right upper cover See p 5 49P 2 Remove the manual feed pull out roller unit See p 5 50P 3 Remove the stop print 1 and detach the pickup roller 2 F05 901 05 9 1 5 Removing the Separation Roller 1 Remove the manual feed pull out roller unit see p 5 50P 2 Remove the two stop rings 1 left right and remove the two bushings 2 then deta...

Страница 350: ... the upper guide 1 3 If double feeding or pickup failure oc curs during pickup adjust the position of the pressure spring of the separation roller F05 901 08 If double feeding occurs remove the mounting screw 2 and shift down the mounting base 3 then fix it in hole A using a mounting screw 2 If pickup failure occurs remove the mounting screw 2 and shift the mounting base 3 up then fix it in hole B...

Страница 351: ...ensor 1 Open the right upper cover See p 5 49P 2 Remove the mounting screw 1 and detach the cover 2 F05 901 10 3 Remove the mounting screw 3 and detach the sensor unit 4 F05 901 11 4 Free the harness 5 from the harness guide 6 and disconnect the connector 7 5 Remove the sensor 8 F05 901 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 352: ... F05 901 13 9 1 9 Removing the Manual Feed Pull Out Roller 1 Open the right upper cover See p 5 49P 2 Remove the manual feed pull out roller unit See p 5 50P 3 Remove the two E rings 1 left right 4 Remove the stopper 2 two gears 3 and two bushings 4 5 Remove the two E rings 5 and two bushings 6 then detach the manual feed pull out roller When removing the stopper 2 and the gear 3 take care not to ...

Страница 353: ...deck will cause the lifter to get trapped not holding the pickup assembly from slid ing out 3 Remove the mounting screw 1 and detach the connector cover 2 then disconnect the connector 3 4 Remove the three mounting screws 4 and detach the pickup assembly 5 F05 902 01 9 2 2 Removing the Left Deck Pickup Assembly 1 Slide out the left right deck 2 Remove the two stoppers 2 found on the left and right...

Страница 354: ...otherwise the pickup assembly could drop when the fixing plate is removed F05 902 04 9 2 3 Removing the Cassette 3 Pickup Assembly Use the steps used to remove the right deck pickup assembly 9 2 4 Removing the Cassette 4 Pickup Assembly Use the steps used to remove the right deck pickup assembly 9 2 5 Removing the Pickup Roller 1 Remove the pickup assembly from the machine 2 Remove the two resin E...

Страница 355: ...machine is silver colored When mounting the pickup roller 4 to the pickup assembly be sure that the marking 5 on the color silver col ored is toward the rear of the machine F05 902 07 9 2 6 Removing the Feeding Roller 1 Remove the pickup assembly form the machine 2 Remove the screw 2 and detach the feeding roller cover 1 For the left deck pickup assembly skip this step 3 Remove the resin E ring 3 ...

Страница 356: ... 2 is at the front of the machine Check to make sure that the protrusion in the roller plate and the roller are engaged securely F05 902 09 9 2 8 Removing the Separation Roller 1 Remove the two mounting screws 1 and detach the feed guide plate 2 then detach the open close guide 3 Skip this step for the left deck pickup assembly F05 902 10 2 Remove the two mounting screws 4 and detach the separatio...

Страница 357: ...support F05 902 12 The urethane sponge used in the part is pink at the beginning and changes to yellow over time accelerated if exposed to light it may appear to change to or ange before turning pink This is a common characteristic of urethane sponge and does not indicate physical deterioration performance In addition note that the part is not classified by color F05 902 13 7 7 Urethane sponge Dow...

Страница 358: ... pickup failure occurs change the spring in the direction of arrow A F05 902 14 9 2 10 Orientation of the Separation Roller Keep the following in mind when replac ing the separation roller Mounting the separation roller in the wrong orientation will lead to interference against crimping washer Make sure it is mounted in the correct orienta tion F05 902 15 Cassette 3 4 Right deck pickup assembly Le...

Страница 359: ...four screws 2 and the two fixing screws 3 on the cassette front cover 1 F05 902 16 2 Move the cassette guide assembly front 4 to the front or the rear to make adjustments F05 902 17 9 2 12 Adjusting the Registration for the Cassette 3 4 1 Loosen the two fixing screws 1 found on the left and right of the cassette F05 902 18 1 2 2 3 2 3 4 1 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 360: ...4 1 Slide out the right deck and the cassette 3 4 2 Take out the cassette right cover See 9 3 2 Removing the Vertical Path Roller 2 3 Remove the two fixing screws 1 of the lifter motor M20 M21 and disconnect the connector 2 then detach the lifter motor 3 F05 902 20 9 2 14 Adjusting the Position of the Lifter Motor M20 M21 of the Cassette 3 cassette 4 1 Remove the guide plate 1 of the verti cal pat...

Страница 361: ...e of the ma chine then check also to make sure that the lifter drive gear is fully away from the lifter gear when the release button 7 of the cassette 3 cassette 4 is pressed halfway The expression pressing the release button halfway means the following The separation roller moves down The cassette is about to slide out F05 902 23 5 If the filter drive gear is not fully away from the lifter motor ...

Страница 362: ...g conditions and turn on the machine the cassette contains no paper the cassette contains about 550 sheets of paper 9 2 15 Adjusting the Position of the Cassette 3 4 Pickup Solenoid SL3 4 Adjust the position of the solenoid using the two screws 3 so that the distance from the bottom of the pickup assembly to section A of the roller arm is 36 0 5 mm when 1 and 2 are operated as shown F05 902 25 1 2...

Страница 363: ...ing 1 1 pc bushing 2 1 pc 3 Remove the following from the rear E ring 3 1 pc bushing 4 2 pc roller base 5 blue gear 6 parallel pin 7 F05 903 01 4 Remove the guide plate 8 and detach the vertical path roller 1 9 F05 903 02 9 3 2 Removing the Vertical Path Roller 2 1 Slide out the right deck and the cassette 3 4 2 Remove the three screws 1 and detach the cassette holder right cover 2 F05 903 03 1 2 ...

Страница 364: ...ring 7 toward the inside then detach the vertical path roller 2 8 F05 903 05 9 3 3 Removing the Vertical Path Roller 3 4 1 Remove the cassette pickup assembly 2 Remove the following from the front E ring 1 1 pc spacer 2 1 pc bearing 3 1 pc 3 Remove the following from the rear E ring 3 3 pc bushing 4 2 pc roller mount 5 blue gear 6 parallel pin 7 4 Remove the vertical path roller 2 3 8 F05 903 06 5...

Страница 365: ...etach the stopper 2 3 Disconnect the connector 3 and re move the registration clutch 4 F05 904 01 9 4 2 Removing the Registration Roller 1 Remove the fixing feeding unit from the machine 2 Remove the feeding right cover of the fixing feeding unit 3 Remove the transfer separation charging assembly 4 Remove the registration clutch 5 Remove the two mounting screws 1 and detach the protection cover 2 ...

Страница 366: ...1 12 13 14 15 6 Remove the following from the back spring 3 E ring 4 spacer 5 bearing 6 stopper 7 F05 904 03 7 Remove the following from the front screw 8 spring 9 E ring 10 spacer 11 bearing 12 stopper 13 break 14 8 Remove the registration roller 15 F05 904 04 3 4 5 6 7 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 367: ...connect the two connectors 1 and remove the screw 2 then detach the harness guide 3 F05 905 01 4 Remove the two mounting screws 4 and detach the fixing feeding unit re leasing lever support 5 F05 905 02 5 Remove the E ring 6 bearing 7 and two screws 8 from the front F05 905 03 6 Remove the E ring 9 pulley 10 pin 11 three screws 12 E ring 13 and bearing 14 then detach the feeding belt unit 15 F05 9...

Страница 368: ...witch 1 Slide the fixing feeding unit out of the machine 2 Remove the feeding right cover and the feeding left cover 3 Disconnect the two connectors 1 and remove the screw 2 then detach the harness guide 3 F05 905 06 4 Remove the two mounting screws 4 and detach the fixing feeding unit re leasing lever support 5 F05 905 07 5 Remove the two mounting screws 6 and detach the releasing lever switch 7 ...

Страница 369: ...e it may suffer dam age F05 906 01 9 6 2 Removing the Reversing Flapper Solenoid 1 Remove the duplex unit from the ma chine 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and free the harness 3 from the guide 2 3 Remove the two mounting screws 4 and detach the reversing flapper sole noid 5 The steps of installation refer to 9 6 17 Mounting the Reversing Flapper solenoid F05 906 02 9 6 3 Removing the Reversal Motor ...

Страница 370: ...sal motor 5 from the support plate F05 906 04 9 6 4 Mounting the Reversal Motor 1 While the spring 1 has most tension tighten the two mounting screws 2 temporarily F05 906 05 2 Mount the support plate 4 2 pc and the motor 5 using three mounting screws 3 then attach the timing belt 6 F05 906 06 4 4 5 1 1 2 2 3 3 6 4 5 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 371: ...ng belt has tension 9 6 5 Removing the Duplexing Feeding Left Motor 1 Remove the front cover of the duplex unit 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and re move the two screws 2 then detach the duplex feeding left motor 3 F05 906 08 9 6 6 Removing the Duplex Feeding Right Motor 1 Remove the front cover of the duplex unit 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and re move the two screws 2 then detach the duplex feed...

Страница 372: ...or 1 and free the harness 2 from the harness guide 3 4 Remove the two mounting screws 4 and detach the horizontal registration motor 5 F05 906 10 9 6 8 Removing the Duplex Pre Registration Sensor 1 Slide the duplex unit out the machine 2 Remove the two mounting screws 1 and detach the cover 2 F05 906 11 3 Remove the two mounting screws 3 and detach the sensor together with its base 4 F05 906 12 3 ...

Страница 373: ... 6 9 Removing the Duplex Paper Sensor 1 Slide the duplex unit out of the duplex unit 2 Remove the two mounting screws 1 and detach the cover 2 F05 906 14 3 Remove the two mounting screws 3 and detach the sensor together with its base 4 F05 906 15 4 Disconnect the connector 5 and re move the sensor 6 F05 906 16 5 6 2 1 3 3 4 5 6 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 374: ... Remove the two mounting screws 1 and detach the sensor together with its base 2 F05 906 17 3 Disconnect the connector 3 and de tach the sensor 4 F05 906 18 9 6 11 Removing the Reversal Sensor 2 1 Slide the duplex unit out of the ma chine 2 Remove the two mounting screws 1 and detach the sensor together with its base 2 F05 906 19 1 1 2 3 4 1 1 2 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogsp...

Страница 375: ...e the sensor 4 F05 906 20 9 6 12 Removing the Left Deck Feed Paper Sensor 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and re move the two mounting screws 2 from the bottom of the duplex unit then de tach the sensor together with its base 3 F05 906 21 2 Remove the left deck feed paper sensor 4 F05 906 22 3 4 2 2 3 1 4 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 376: ...gistration unit 3 Disconnect the connector 1 and re move the horizontal registration sensor 2 F05 906 23 9 6 14 Removing the Duplex Driver PCB 1 Slide the duplex driver out of the ma chine 2 Remove the front cover of the duplex driver 3 Disconnect all connectors from the du plex driver PCB 4 Remove the four mounting screws 1 and detach the duplex driver PCB 2 F05 906 24 1 2 1 1 2 1 Download Free S...

Страница 377: ...ove the mounting screw 1 from the front 5 Remove the mounting screw 2 and disconnect the connector 3 from the rear then detach the horizontal regis tration unit 4 F05 906 25 9 6 16 Removing the Duplex Feeding Fan 1 Slide out the duplex unit and detach the front cover of the duplex unit 2 Remove the two mounting screws 1 and disconnect the connector 2 then detach the fan together with its base 3 F0...

Страница 378: ...sure that the arrow indicat ing the direction of air is as in dicated when mounting the du plex feeldng fan F05 906 27 9 6 17 Mounting the Reversing Flapper Solenoid 1 Adjust the position of the solenoid us ing two screws 2 so that the drive le ver 1 is fully pushed when the sole noid turns on i e the plunger is drawn F05 906 28 5 4 1 2 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 379: ...Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 380: ...COPYRIGHT 2000 CANON INC 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000 iR6000 REV 0 JULY 2000 CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 381: ...Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 382: ...uence Web roller driven by solenoid and one way clutch 1 By thermistor temperature error 2 By thermal switch overheating 1 Control of fixing assembly inlet guide drive about 1 mm up down High if original is B5R or longer Low if original is shorter than B5R 2 Control of reciprocating movement of thermistor about 12 mm 3 Control of reciprocating movement of upper separation claw about 3 mm 1 Outline...

Страница 383: ...g web unit Cleaning web Main thermistor TH1 Sub thermistor TH2 Main heater H1 Thermal switch TP1 Fixing assembly inlet guide Fixing upper roller Fixing lower roller Lower separation claw Sub heater H2 Upper separation claw F06 101 01 Fixing upper roller Sub thermistor TH2 Main thermistor TH1 Thermal switch TP1 F06 101 02 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 384: ...on twice for the 1st sheet and then once for the 2nd and 3rd sheets repeats the sequence thereafter For small size paper smaller than B4 turns on once for the 1st and 2nd sheets and remains off for the 3rd sheet repeats the sequence thereafter Moves in reciprocating motions about 3 mm Moves up down about 1 8 mm T06 101 02 Component Fixing upper roller Fixing lower roller Fixing motor Fixing assemb...

Страница 385: ...system Wait indicator Red Red Green Fixing motor M3 Main heater H1 100V Sub heater H2 SLEEP WMUP WMUPR STBY INTR PSTBY PRINT LSTR STBY Main power switch ON Control panel power switch ON Fixing tem perature 195 C 205 C 200 C 195 C 190 C 200 C Start key ON 210 C 120 230V Sub heater H2 F06 102 01 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 386: ...leaning web drive 3 Fixing assembly inlet guide drive 4 Thermistor reciprocating mechanism drive 5 Upper separation claw reciprocating mechanism M19 SL1 SL9 DC controller PCB J106B Drive signal Drive signal Drive signal J106B Fixing inlet guide drive solenoid Fixing drive motor Thermistor TH1 Upper separation claw Fixing web drive solenoid PS45 Fixing web length sensor Drive signal J106A J106B Dow...

Страница 387: ...specific level 0 F06 202 01 E014 fixing motor speed error It is indicated when the drive lock signal is absent for 2 sec or more 2 sec after the fixing motor drive signal M19ON is generated DC controller PCB M19LD 2 GND 5V M19ON 1 M19 Fixing upper roller Fixing motor J106 A15 A16 A17 A18 24V DC power supply PCB GND J4005 1 2 2 2 Controlling the Drive of the Fixing Roller The system used to control...

Страница 388: ...e Cleaning Web The cleaning web used to clean the fixing upper roller is advanced by the fixing web sole noid SL9 one way clutch The length of the cleaning web is detected by any of the following two ways 1 When the web detecting lever drops through the cut out it blocks the fixing web length sensor PS45 causing the message Web Running Out to appear in the con trol panel E005 will appear when the ...

Страница 389: ... inlet guide moves down 2 4 Controlling the Drive of the Fixing Assembly Inlet Guide The machine changes the height of the fixing assembly inlet guide to suit specific paper sizes thereby ensuring correct movement of paper The height is controlled by the fixing as sembly inlet solenoid operated by the following control system Fixing inlet guide solenoid SL1 DC controller PCB J106A 24V SL1P 1 SL1R ...

Страница 390: ...the Ther mistor To prevent damage to the fixing upper roller by the main thermistor TH1 the main ther mistor is moved back and forth over a distance of about 12 mm in the axial direction of the fixing upper roller The drive comes from the web drive solenoid SL9 and is sent to the reciprocating cam by way of a one way arm The control system of the thermistor reciprocating mechanism is constructed a...

Страница 391: ...ox 2 6 Controlling the Reciprocating Mechanism of the Upper Separation Claw To prevent damage to the fixing upper roller by the upper separation claw the upper sepa ration claw is moved back and forth in the axial direction of the fixing upper roller The system used to control the reciprocating mechanism of the upper separation claw is constructed as follows F06 206 01 Download Free Service Manual...

Страница 392: ... Internal paper detection signal IDS J106 B1 Claw jam detection signal CJAM J106 B19 Web length detection signal CBOP J106 B5 Main thermistor signal TH1 J108 B7 Main heater drive signal MHRD J102 B11 Sub heater drive signal SHRD J102 B9 Main thermistor TH1 AC power supply Web guide plate PS45 PS35 Sub thermistor signal TH2 J106 B9 Main heater detection signal MHRD J102 B12 Sub heater detection sig...

Страница 393: ...mperature thus sav ing on power consumption Used to decrease the print start temperature by 15 C to reduce print time for iR5000 4 min or less for iR6000 1 min or less Used to switch the down sequence temperature in creases the fixing temperature by 10 C Used to switch the down sequence temperature de creases the fixing temperature by 10 C Used to increase the fixing temperature at the start of pr...

Страница 394: ...3 Main heater H1 100V Sub heater H2 SLEEP WMUP WMUPR 1 STBY INTR PSTBY PRINT LSTR STBY Main power switch ON Control panel power switch ON 205 C 200 C 195 C Start key ON 210 C 120 230V Sub heater H2 1 WMUPR in H mode is longer by 1 min 215 C H mode M L mode F06 302 01 T06 302 02 Control temperature Ambient temperature Initial multiple rotation Standby Start of printing During printing H mode 195 C ...

Страница 395: ...00V Sub heater H2 SLEEP WMUP WMUPR STBY INTR PSTBY PRINT LSTR STBY Main power switch ON Control panel power switch ON Fixing assembly 195 C 205 C 200 C 195 C 200 C Start key ON 210 C 120 130V Sub heater H2 215 C F06 302 02 Control temperature Initial multiple rotation Standby Start of printing During printing 195 C 200 C 200 C 203 C T06 302 03 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot...

Страница 396: ...ses the sheet to sheet interval to maintain a specific fixing temperature so as to prevent faulty fixing in continuous printing mode iR5000 Down Sequence Model Control temperature 50 cpm return mode 40 cpm mode 35 cpm mode print stop 100 V 170 C 165 C 160 C 155 C 120 230 V 175 C 170 C 165 C 160 C Control temperature iR6000 Down Sequence 60 cpm return mode 50 cpm mode 40 cpm mode print stop 175 C 1...

Страница 397: ...in combination with a non text mode the machine will use non text mode down sequence throughout the job by placing priority on fixing iR5000 Down Sequence Model Control temperature 50 cpm return mode 40 cpm mode 35 cpm mode print stop 100 V 180 C 175 C 170 C 165 C 120 230 V 185 C 180 C 175 C 170 C Control temperature iR6000 Down Sequence 60 cpm return mode 50 cpm mode 40 cpm mode print stop 185 C ...

Страница 398: ...ery Mode The sequence used after jam removal differs depending on the following conditions 1 If paper exists in the fixing feeding assembly The fixing heater will be turned off in response to a jam and post jam removal initial multiple rotation will be excluded 2 If no paper exists in the fixing feeding assembly The temperature control mechanism is turned on without turning off the fixing heater a...

Страница 399: ...or error by the sub thermistor TH2 3 Overheating error by the thermal switch TP1 DC controller PCB J106B 1 1 1 7 8 10 20 S TEMP 2 0V 0V M TEMP 1 Fixing upper roller Main heater Sub thermistor Main thermistor Thermal switch 9 J102B 1 11 10 0V 12V SUB_HT_ON 3 MAIN_DETECT 6 MAIN_HT_ON 5 SUB_DETECT 4 9 14 AC line off at 240 C RLY Relay Front cover AC driver 12 13 Sub heater 8 7 J119 1 1 1 3 4 2 24V 0V...

Страница 400: ...AC driver PCB is faulty The DC controller PCB is faulty E001 The main thermistor TH1 has a short circuit The sub thermistor TH2 has detected overheating The AC driver PCB is faulty The DC controller PCB is faulty E002 The main thermistor TH1 has poor contact or an open circuit The thermal switch TP1 has an open circuit The fixing heater has an open circuit The AC driver PCB is faulty The DC contro...

Страница 401: ...bled by reversing the steps used to disassemble it 3 The screws must be identified by type length diameter and location 4 The mounting screw of the grounding wire and the varistors is equipped with a toothed washer to ensure electrical continuity They must not be left out when fitting the screws 5 As a rule the machine must not be operated with any of its parts removed 6 The front door switch or t...

Страница 402: ...fixing feeding unit out of the machine 4 While pressing the stoppers 5 on both ends of the fixing feeding unit slide rail 4 pull the fixing feeding unit farther toward the front 5 With the fixing feeding unit fully out insert a think screwdriver into the hole 6 of the rails on both sides then while releasing the stoppers pull the fixing feeding unit 7 to the front to detach To slide in the unit fi...

Страница 403: ...xing feeding unit 2 Remove the three screws 1 and the knob 2 then detach the fixing feeding left cover 3 F06 401 03 3 Disconnect the two connectors 4 and remove the three screws 5 then de tach the fixing drive assembly 6 F06 401 04 4 Disconnect the three connectors 7 and free the harness from the harness guide F06 401 05 7 7 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 404: ...11 13 10 5 Remove the mounting screw 8 and detach the cover 9 F06 401 06 6 Open the fixing delivery assembly and remove the two screws 10 then hold ing the front 12 and the rear 13 of the fixing assembly 11 remove the fixing assembly from the machine F06 401 07 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 405: ...xing feeding unit 2 Remove the screw 1 and detach the fixing assembly upper cover 2 F06 402 01 3 Remove the two screws 3 used to hold the fixing web assembly in place and open the fixing web upper assembly F06 402 02 4 While pushing the web feed roller 4 and the web take up roller 5 toward the rear remove the web 6 F06 402 03 2 1 3 5 6 4 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 406: ... Web Mount the fixing web by reversing the steps used to remove it 1 Wind the web 2 around the web take up roller 1 two or three times while making sure that the arm guide plate 3 will be outside the take up roller when attaching to the front At this time check to make sure that the area of contact with the roller is impreg nated with oil F06 402 05 Check to make sure that the fix ing web is not a...

Страница 407: ...L 1 FIX WEB F06 402 07 4 2 3 Adjusting the Fixing Web Solenoid SL9 a If the fixing web is new Adjust the position of the solenoid us ing the screw 2 so that the distance of travel of the drive lever 1 is 8 6 mm F06 402 08 b If the fixing web has been used Before removing the solenoid find out the position A of the drive lever when the solenoid turns on then after replac ing the solenoid make adjus...

Страница 408: ...tons 1 and the two screws 2 at the rear then detach the heater positioning plate rear 3 F06 403 01 3 Remove the screw 4 and the faston 5 at the front and detach the harness cover 6 The harness is equipped with a tie wrap Be sure to use a new tie wrap if you have cut the tie wrap F06 403 02 4 Remove the screw 7 and detach the heater positioning plate front 8 5 Remove the main heater and the sub hea...

Страница 409: ... and the sub heater 2 to the left view ing from the front of the fixing assem bly d Stagger the heater so that its protrusion will not interfere e When mounting the faston of the fixing heater at the rear be sure that the faston terminals A B do not face the outside rather they must be parallel with the holder F06 403 05 4 3 3 Removing the Thermal Switch 1 Remove the fixing assembly form the machi...

Страница 410: ...detach the thermal switch assembly 8 F06 403 07 5 Remove the two screws 9 and detach the thermal switch 10 F06 403 08 4 3 4 Removing the Main Thermistor 1 Remove the fixing assembly from the machine 2 Remove the fixing web and the oil pan 3 Remove the fixing harness cover 4 Remove the two screws 1 and detach the insulating plate 2 F06 403 09 9 9 10 1 2 8 7 7 6 4 4 5 Download Free Service Manual at...

Страница 411: ...ssembly to the rear take care not to damage the fixing roller by the thermistor assembly When mounting the thermistor be sure that the harness 3 is on the inner side of the harness guide 6 of the mounting plate Further take care not to deform section A when detaching and attaching the thermistor F06 403 10 7 Remove the two thermistor retaining springs 7 and detach the main ther mistor 8 F06 403 11...

Страница 412: ...ssembly from the machine 2 Remove the fixing web and the oil pan 3 Remove the fixing harness cover 4 Free the harness 1 of the sub ther mistor from the harness guide 5 Remove the screw 2 and detach the sub thermistor assembly 3 F06 403 12 6 Remove the screw 4 and detach the sub thermistor 5 F06 403 13 4 5 1 3 2 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 413: ... Remove the two fixing heaters 4 Remove the stopper 1 one each from the front and the rear 5 While paying attention to the thermal switch and the thermistor detach the upper roller assembly F06 404 01 6 Remove the C ring 2 at the front and remove the gear 3 bushing 4 and bearing 5 7 Remove the C ring 6 at the rear and remove the gear 7 bearing 8 and bushing 9 F06 404 02 front rear 1 1 9 8 7 6 2 3 ...

Страница 414: ...rear as shown c Before mounting it clean the electrode plate and the elec trode terminals F06 404 03 4 4 3 Removing the Fixing Lower Roller 1 Remove the fixing assembly from the machine 2 Remove the fixing web and clean and remove the oil pan 3 Open the fixing upper unit 4 Remove the two screws 1 and detach the lower separation claw support plate 2 F06 404 04 5 Remove the lower roller 3 from the f...

Страница 415: ... points indicated a and c are prints 10 mm from both edges of the sheet F06 404 06 2 Check to make sure the measurements are as indicated if not go to c to make adjustments Be sure that both upper and lower rollers are sufficiently heated when taking measure ments T06 404 01 c Making Adjustments 1 Take the fixing assembly out of the ma chine 2 Open the delivery assembly 3 Adjust the nip using the ...

Страница 416: ...pper separation claw 2 When mounting it take care not to chip the tip of the upper sepa ration claw 2 F06 405 01 4 5 2 Removing the Lower Separation Claw 1 Remove the fixing assembly from the machine 2 Remove the two screws and detach the lower separation claw assembly 3 Remove the spring 1 of the lower separation claw F06 405 02 4 Remove the three screws 2 and detach the lower separation claw sup...

Страница 417: ...ng unit out of the machine Remove the two screws 1 and detach the delivery roller guide 2 F06 406 01 2 Remove the screw 3 and the bushing 4 then detach the delivery unit 5 3 Remove the E ring 6 at the front and detach the bearing 7 F06 406 02 4 Slide the external delivery roller assem bly 8 toward the rear to detach F06 406 03 1 2 1 3 4 5 7 6 8 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspo...

Страница 418: ...care not to drop it F06 406 04 4 6 2 Removing the Internal Delivery Roller 1 Remove the fixing assembly from the machine 2 Remove the lower separation claw plate 3 Remove the two E rings 1 at the front and remove the gear 2 and the bearing 3 F06 406 05 4 Remove the E ring 4 at the rear and remove the bearing 5 and the internal delivery roller 6 F06 406 06 11 9 10 1 2 1 3 6 5 4 Download Free Servic...

Страница 419: ...YSTEM 6 38 P 4 6 3 Adjusting the Position of the Delivery Flapper Solenoid SL5 Adjust the position of the solenoid using the screw 2 so that the drive lever 1 is fully pushed when the solenoid turns on i e the plunger is drawn F06 406 07 2 1 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 420: ... detach the sensor together with its sup port plate 2 F06 407 01 5 Disconnect the connector 3 and re move the snap on assembly then de tach the claw jam sensor 4 F06 407 02 4 7 2 Removing the Internal Delivery Sensor 1 Remove the fixing assembly from the machine 2 Remove the two screws and detach the lower separation claw assembly 3 Remove the internal delivery roller 4 Remove the mounting screw 1...

Страница 421: ...the internal delivery sensor 4 F06 407 04 4 7 3 Removing the Delivery Jam Sensor 1 Remove the fixing assembly from the machine 2 Remove the external delivery roller 3 Remove the two screws 1 and detach the sensor support plate 2 F06 407 05 4 Disconnect the connector 3 and de tach the delivery jam sensor 4 F06 407 06 4 3 2 1 4 3 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 422: ...ernal Delivery Sensor 1 Remove the fixing feeding unit from the machine 2 Remove the external delivery roller 3 Remove the two sensors 1 and detach the sensor support plate 2 F06 407 07 4 Disconnect the connector 3 and de tach the external delivery sensor 4 F06 407 08 2 1 4 3 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 423: ... must be positioned as indicated 2 The inlet guide must shift down when the solenoid SL1 turns on 3 The height of the inlet guide must be such that the difference between front and rear is 0 5 mm or less 4 The height of the inlet guide must be adjusted by loosening the fixing screw on the height adjusting support plate If the inlet guide base is removed the position of the inlet guide will have to...

Страница 424: ...COPYRIGHT 2000 CANON INC 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000 iR6000 REV 0 JULY 2000 CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 425: ...Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 426: ...tivation of LEDs in the control panel COPIER FUNCTION PANEL LED OFF Used to end a check on the activation of LEDs in the control panel COPIER FUNCTION PANEL KEY CHK Used to start a check on key inputs COPIER FUNCTION PANEL TOUCHCHK Used to adjust the coordinates in the touch panel CPU Control panel inverter PCB LCD PCB Control panel PCB key LED Control panel power switch PCB LCD contrast adjustmen...

Страница 427: ...De curling fan DC power supply fan Hard disk fan Duplexing feeding fan Function Draws print paper to the feed belt Cools the primary charging assem bly and cleaner Discharges exhaust of each fan to the outside of the machine Cools the laser unit drive unit and controller Removes curling of print paper af ter fixing Cools the power supply PCB Cools the hard disk Cools the duplexing feeding mo tor 2...

Страница 428: ... CANON iR5000 iR6000 REV 0 JULY 2000 CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 7 3 P The arrangement of the fans and the direction of air are as follows F07 201 01 FM3 FM1 FM4 FM2 FM5 FM8 FM6 FM7 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 429: ...an FM1 DC power supply FM6 Duplexing feeding fan FM8 Heat discharge fan FM3 Primary charging cooling fan FM2 De curling fan FM5 Controller cooling fan FM4 Hard disk fan FM7 Warm up Printer unit Initial multiple rotation Standby Printing Low power mode Door open Jam After printing yyy yyy yyy yyy yyy yyy yyy yyy yyy yyy yyy yyy yyyyy yyyyy yyyyy yyyyy yyyyyy yyyyyy yyy yyy yyyyy yyyyy yyyyyy yyyyyy...

Страница 430: ...scription Generates DC power from AC power Protects against overcurrent Limits rush current to the fixing feeding assembly duplexing unit and high voltage PCB Protects the lens heater H6 and mirror heater H7 against overcurrent Serves as the power switch of a load other than the drum heater H3 cassette heater H4 and deck heater H5 When off the drum heater H3 operates in conjunction with the turnin...

Страница 431: ...ave ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF Half wave OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON Half wave ON ON ON ON Control panel switch OFF ON ON OFF Full wave OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON Full wave ON ON ON ON Printing ON ON OFF Half wave OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON Half wave 1 OFF OFF ON ON Power save ON ON OFF Full wave OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON Full wave ON ON ON ON 1 If underlined applies to the 100 V model the 120 230 V model is subject...

Страница 432: ... 3VA 24V 24VU 5V Laser driver PCB Laser scanner motor 24VU3 Finisher accessory 24VA ADF 24VU Paper deck accessory 24VU2 NE data controller accessory 5V 24VU2 5V 12VU Motor driver PCB Main motor M2 Drum motor M1 24V 5V 24V 24VU1 5V 5V Main relay RL1 Thermal switch TP1 Sub heater H2 Duplexing driver PCB Control panel CPU PCB Control panel switch Accessories power supply PCB DC power supply PCB Rush ...

Страница 433: ... on the combina tion of the signal from the printer board and the state of the power switch and the control panel switch T07 301 04 Main power switch SW1 OFF ON ON Control panel switch or print board signal OFF OFF ON Power output from DC power supply PCB None 3 3VB All Remarks If the environment switch SW3 is ON the drum heater will be supplied with power AC In addition if the heater switch SW4 i...

Страница 434: ...J4014 3 J4014 4 J4014 5 3VA2 J4017 1 J4017 2 J4017 3 J4017 4 J4017 5 3 3 4V 9 0A 5 5 to 8 0A 3VA3 J4003 7 3VB J4015 1 J4015 2 J4015 3 2 2 5 3 5V 2 5A 4 0 to 8 0A 5V J4003 5 J4004 1 J4008 1 J4009 1 J4016 1 J4016 2 3 5 1V 4 5A 1 0 to 5 0A 12VU J4003 3 J4003 4 5 12 0V 1 0A 2 5 to 5 0A Output Connector Output voltage tolerance Rated output voltage Rated output current Level of activation overcurrent p...

Страница 435: ...nt the machine will stop out puts 2 and 3 Likewise when the over current circuit 3 detects a high level of current the machine will stop output 3 The machine is also equipped with a fuse to cut off outputs in the event any of the ele ments in circuits fails Output 2 Sequence control circuit 3VA1 3VA2 3VA3 5V 12VU Output stop signal Output 3 DC power supply PCB Converter circuit 2 3VA1 3VA2 3VA3 5V...

Страница 436: ...1 2 and 3 of the DC power supply PCB Stops outputs 1 and 2 of the DC power supply PCB Stops output 3 of the DC power supply PCB Resetting Turn off the main power switch and remove the cause then leave the machine alone for about 3 min and turn on the main power switch Remove the cause and turn off and then on the control panel power switch Remove the cause then turn off and then on the control pan...

Страница 437: ...motor is reduced 1 2 to lower the machine s operating noise when it is in standby state The time interval used by the ma chine to shift to silent mode is set in user mode The machine has to wait until the revolution of the laser scanner motor returns from silent mode to normal taking a while longer than otherwise before it starts printing Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 438: ...assembled by reversing the steps used to disassemble it 3 The screws must be identified by type length diameter and location 4 The mounting screw of the grounding wire and the varistors is equipped with a toothed washer to ensure electrical continuity They must not be left out when fitting the screws 5 As a rule the machine must not be operated with any of its parts removed 6 The front door switch...

Страница 439: ...er 1 2 Upper cover 3 3 Upper cover base 4 4 Right rear paper cover 3 5 Right rear lower cover 2 6 Reader right cover 2 7 Reader front cover right upper cover right upper cover base reader right left cover 2 screws Externals 1 F07 501 01 8 Rear upper cover 4 9 PCB cover 4 10 Rear lower cover 7 11 Filter cover 1 12 Left lower cover 5 2 grip covers 13 Left upper cover 6 delivery assembly cover 14 Del...

Страница 440: ...NTROLS 7 15 P 1 3 2 5 4 5 1 2 Removing the Front Cover 1 Open the front cover 1 and remove the screw 3 of the door tape 2 2 Remove the stopper 4 and detach the hinge shaft 5 by pulling it up 3 Pull the front door up at an angle to de tach F07 501 03 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 441: ... 23 5 2 Arrangement of Electrical Parts rear of the machine The following shows the arrangement of the electrical parts found on the back of the ma chine after removing the following four parts main controller box assembly p 7 22P DC controller PCB p 7 46P waste toner bottle p 7 33P high voltage PCB p 7 24P F07 502 01 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 442: ...pper lower PS49 PS50 12 Power supply transformer 13 Cassette 3 length detection cassette 3 level detection SVR2 cassette 3 paper width detection SVR4 14 Cassette 4 length detection cassette 4 level detection SVR3 cassette 4 paper width detection SVR5 15 Right deck pickup releasing solenoid SL7 16 Vertical path lower motor M27 17 Right deck pickup motor M11 18 Right deck lifter drive assembly right...

Страница 443: ...he front 3 Remove the three screws 1 and detach the front door switch cover 2 F07 503 01 4 Remove the five screws 3 and discon nect the connector 4 then detach the control panel 5 F07 503 02 5 3 2 Removing the Control Panel Control PCB and Keypad PCB 1 Remove the control panel 2 Remove the screw 1 and detach the control panel base 2 then remove the four screws 3 and detach the base cover 4 F07 503...

Страница 444: ... screws 5 and detach the control panel shielding plate 6 F07 503 04 4 Disconnect the six connectors 7 and remove the two flexible cables 8 and the three screws 9 then detach the control panel control PCB 10 F07 503 05 5 Remove the insulating sheet 11 and remove the nine screws 12 then de tach the keypad PCB 13 F07 503 06 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 445: ...to re move the control panel control PCB to detach the control panel shielding plate 2 Remove the four cable clamps 1 the grounding screw 2 and the two screws 3 then detach the touch panel shielding plate 4 F07 503 07 3 Disconnect the connector 5 and re move the two flexible cables 6 and the four screws 7 then detach the touch panel unit 8 F07 503 08 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 b...

Страница 446: ... to refer to the color of each round label attached to the EEP ROM for correct transfer Be sure to enter the values indicated on the label 3 on the new PCB in service mode by making the following selections COPIER ADJUST HV TR D PRE TR COPIER ADJUST HV TR D HV TR COPIER ADJUST HV SP D HV SP COPIER ADJUST DEVELOP D HV DE Be sure to transfer the shorting connector 4 of J303 on the PCB from the old t...

Страница 447: ... 03 4 Remove the five screws 3 and slide out the main controller box 4 5 When removing the main controller box 4 disconnect all connectors of the main controller PCB in advance 6 Remove the two screws 5 and detach the two PCB guides 6 F07 504 04 7 Disconnect the ten connectors and re move the 11 screws 7 then detach the main controller PCB 8 When replacing the main con troller PCB remove the screw...

Страница 448: ... Supply PCB 1 Remove the left lower cover 2 Remove the seven screws 1 and de tach the shielding plate 2 F07 504 06 3 Remove the 11 screws 3 and detach the power supply cover 4 F07 504 07 4 Disconnect the 15 connectors and re move the two screws 5 then detach the power supply PCB 6 F07 504 08 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 449: ...ine connectors then detach the high voltage power supply PCB 2 F07 504 09 When replacing the PCBs keep the following mind Be sure to enter the values indicated on the label attached to the new PCB indicated by an arrow 3 in service mode by making the follow ing selections COPIER ADJUST HV TR H PRE TR COPIER ADJUST HV TR HVT TR COPIER ADJUST HV SP HVT SP COPIER ADJUST DEVELOP HVT DE Download Free S...

Страница 450: ...nnectors 2 then detach the power cord base 3 F07 504 10 3 Remove the three screws 4 and dis connect the two connectors 5 then detach the accessories power supply PCB 6 F07 504 11 5 4 6 AC Driver PCB 1 Remove the rear upper lower cover and the left upper lower cover 2 Remove the two screws 1 and discon nect the three connectors 2 then de tach the AC driver PCB 3 F07 504 12 1 2 1 1 1 3 2 4 5 4 6 1 2...

Страница 451: ...the two screws 1 and detach the PCB cover 2 F07 504 13 3 Remove the six screws 3 and discon nect the 11 connectors detach the mo tor driver PCB 4 F07 504 14 5 4 8 Anti Rush Current PCB 1 Remove the DC controller PCB 2 Remove the screw 1 and disconnect the three connectors 2 then detach the anti rush current PCB 3 from the printer controller mounting base F07 504 15 1 2 1 3 2 3 3 4 Download Free Se...

Страница 452: ...5 6 1 5 4 9 Serial Number PCB 1 Remove the DC controller PCB 2 Remove the two screws 1 and discon nect the connector 2 then detach the fixing assembly terminal base 3 3 Remove the four screws 4 and dis connect the connector 5 then detach the serial number PCB 6 F07 504 16 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 453: ... 2 then detach the exhaust fan duct 3 F07 505 01 3 Remove the two screws 4 and discon nect the connector 5 then detach the fan grille 6 to detach the exhaust fan 7 F07 505 02 5 5 2 Feeding Fan 1 Remove the DC controller PCB 2 Remove the three screws 1 and detach the primary fan cover 2 3 Remove the three screws 3 and detach the primary fan 4 F07 505 03 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 3 1 2 4 Download Free Service...

Страница 454: ... 44P 3 Remove the screw 1 and disconnect the connector 2 then detach the HDD fan unit 3 F07 505 04 4 Remove the two screws 4 and detach the HDD fan 6 from the duct 5 F07 505 05 5 5 4 DC Power Supply Fan 1 Remove the power supply PCB 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and re move the three screws 2 then detach the DC power supply fan 3 F07 505 06 2 1 3 4 6 5 3 2 2 2 1 Download Free Service Manual at http...

Страница 455: ...ach the left deck drive assembly 3 F07 506 01 5 6 2 Vertical Path Duplex Right Deck Drive Assembly 1 Remove the waste toner bottle holder 2 Remove the the five screws 1 and de tach the grip base 2 F07 506 02 3 Remove the four screws 3 and dis connect the five connectors 4 then release the four cable clamps 5 and detach the vertical path duplex right deck drive assembly 6 F07 506 03 2 1 3 1 1 1 1 2...

Страница 456: ...rew 6 and detach the fixing member 7 4 Remove the five screws 8 and discon nect the connector 9 then detach the main motor drive assembly 10 F07 506 04 5 6 4 Manual Feed Pickup Drive Assembly 1 Remove the main controller box 2 Remove the two screws 1 and detach the scanner fan duct 2 3 Loosen the screw 3 to release the belt tensioner 4 and detach the belt 5 F07 506 05 4 Remove the four screws 6 an...

Страница 457: ...e DC controller base 2 Remove the feeding fan See p 7 28P 3 Remove the waste toner bottle holder 4 Remove the waste toner drive assembly 5 Remove the main motor 6 Remove the four screws 1 and dis connect the connector 2 then detach the left deck pull out roller drive assem bly 3 F07 506 08 5 6 7 Drum Drive Assembly 1 Slide out the hopper assembly 2 Remove the drum fixing member and slide out the p...

Страница 458: ...cover and waste toner bottle 3 By referring to step 3 for the main mo tor remove the main power switch base out of the way 4 Remove the two screws 1 and discon nect the two connectors 2 then de tach the connector base 3 F07 506 10 5 Remove the three screws 4 and detach the waste toner holder 5 Take care not to let the waste toner go astray F07 506 11 6 Remove the four screws 6 and dis connect the ...

Страница 459: ...tor 9 F07 506 13 8 Remove the three screws 10 and dis connect the two connectors 11 then remove the lifter drive assembly 12 F07 506 14 9 Remove the three screws 13 and de tach the vertical path drive assembly 14 10 Remove the cassette 3 4 pickup assem bly See p 5 55P 11 Remove the three screws 15 and de tach the cassette pickup drive assembly 16 F07 506 15 Download Free Service Manual at http pri...

Страница 460: ...LS AND CONTROLS 7 35 P 2 1 3 1 1 5 6 9 Left Deck Lifter Drive Assembly 1 Remove the high voltage power supply PCB 2 Remove the three screws 1 and dis connect the two connectors 2 then detach the left deck lifter drive assem bly 3 F07 506 16 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 461: ... the four screws 1 and dis connect the connector then detach the vertical path lower motor 2 F07 507 01 5 7 2 Main Motor M2 1 Remove the main controller box 2 Remove the right rear lower cover 3 Remove the three screws 1 and re lease the two clamps 2 then remove the main power switch base 3 out of the way F07 507 02 4 Remove the three screws 4 and dis connect the connector 5 then detach the main m...

Страница 462: ...move the main power switch base out of the way 4 Remove the two screws 1 and discon nect the two connectors 2 then de tach the connector base 3 F07 507 04 5 Remove the three screws 4 and detach the waste toner bottle holder 5 Take care not to let the waste toner go astray F07 507 05 6 Remove the three screws 6 and dis connect the connector 7 then detach the vertical path duplex motor 8 7 Remove th...

Страница 463: ...ove the two screws 17 and detach the cassette pickup motor 18 F07 507 08 5 7 4 Pre Registration Motor M17 and Drum Motor M1 1 Remove the reader rear cover rear up per cover and right rear upper cover 2 Remove the main controller box 3 Remove the E ring 1 and bushing 2 4 Disconnect the connector 3 and re move the two screws 4 then detach the pre registration motor M17 5 5 Remove the two screws 6 an...

Страница 464: ...CANON iR5000 iR6000 REV 0 JULY 2000 CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 7 39 P 8 10 9 9 6 Disconnect the two connectors 8 and remove the four screws 9 then detach the drum motor 10 F07 507 10 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 465: ...r bottle holder 3 Remove the three screws 1 and detach the cable support base 2 F07 508 01 4 Remove the two screws 3 and detach the right deck pickup roller releasing solenoid 4 F07 508 02 5 8 2 Adjusting the Position of the Right Deck Pickup Solenoid SL6 Adjust the position of the solenoid so that the left edge of the arm 2 is 57 2 0 5 mm from the center of the hole A in the solenoid mounting bas...

Страница 466: ...r 2 then detach the pickup roller releasing solenoid 3 F07 508 04 5 8 4 Adjusting the Position of the Left Deck Pickup Solenoid SL7 When replacing the solenoid on its own be sure to mount it in its initial position Take note of the position of the fixing screw 2 before detaching the left deck pickup solenoid from the support plate 1 Or mark the position of the solenoid on the support plate with a ...

Страница 467: ...er cover right rear upper cover 2 Remove the main controller box 3 Remove the grip ring 1 and bushing 2 then disconnect the connector 3 and remove the two screws 4 and de tach the manual feed pickup clutch CL4 5 4 Remove the two screws 6 and detach the flywheel 7 F07 509 01 5 Remove the three screws 8 and dis connect the connector 9 then detach the developing clutch CL1 10 F07 509 02 Download Free...

Страница 468: ...t fan duct 2 If the cassette 4 sensor is to be removed remove the two screws 1 disconnect the two connectors 2 and detach the connector base 3 F07 510 01 3 Remove the two screws 4 each and disconnect the connector 5 cassette 3 paper size width sensor 6 cassette 3 paper side length sensor 7 cassette 4 paper size width sensor 8 cassette 4 paper side length sensor 9 F07 510 02 Download Free Service M...

Страница 469: ... HDD 1 Take care to avoid damage by static charge 2 Keep the HDD unit from impact 1 Remove the rear upper cover and the reader rear cover 2 Remove the three screws 1 and detach the cover 2 F07 511 01 3 Remove the two screws 3 and discon nect the two connectors then remove the HDD unit 4 F07 511 02 1 2 4 3 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 470: ... 2000 CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 7 45 P 5 5 5 5 6 4 Remove the six screws 5 and detach the HDD 6 When mounting the HDD unit be sure that the flat cable is un der the plastic sheet of the HDD upper case F07 511 03 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 471: ... the flat cable is un der the plastic sheet of the HDD upper case 2 Remove the nine screws 1 and dis connect the 26 connectors then detach the DC controller PCB base F07 512 01 5 12 2 Relay 1 Remove the rear upper lower cover and left upper lower cover 2 Disconnect the cable connected to the relay and remove the two screws 1 then detach the relay 2 F07 512 02 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 Download Free Servic...

Страница 472: ...former 1 Remove the high voltage power supply PCB 2 Remove the two screws 1 and discon nect the two connectors 2 then slide the transfer unit 3 to the left to detach F07 512 03 3 Remove the two screws 4 and discon nect the connector 5 then detach the transformer 6 F07 512 04 3 1 2 4 4 6 5 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 473: ...Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 474: ...COPYRIGHT 2000 CANON INC 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000 iR6000 REV 0 JULY 2000 CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 475: ...Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 476: ...5 4 5VR DPSP J18 1 2 3 5VR 5VR DPL J19 1 2 3 J09 5 4 3 PS106 PS107 PS108 When paper is detected 1 When paper is absent in the deck 1 When the deck lifter is at the upper limit 1 When the lifter is in pick position 1 When the deck is set to the copier 1 When paper is detected 1 When the deck lifter is in paper supply position 1 When the absence of paper 1 2 level is detected 1 When the compartment ...

Страница 477: ...08 8 7 DOLON NO NO 0VU Power supply J03 J719 Deck open switch Deck open indicator Open switch PCB Deck open detecting switch Deck lifter lower limit detecting switch Deck driver PCB When SW100 is pushed to open the deck 0 When the deck is opening closing 0 LED turns on or flashes while the deck lifter is rotating When the deck is open 1 SW101 is not pushed When the deck lifter is at the lower limi...

Страница 478: ...08 9 10 J01 1 2 3 4 5 6 See p 8 14P See p 8 15P CL102 24VU DPUCD J13 2 1 J05 11 12 DPRSD 24VU SL101 J9 2 1 J8 1 2 J05 1 2 DOPSD 24VU SL102 J23 2 1 J09 1 2 24V 24V DMMA DMMA DMMB DMMB Deck main motor Deck lifter motor Deck pickup clutch Deck pickup roller releasing solenoid Deck open solenoid Deck driver PCB When 0 ON When 0 ON When 0 ON Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 479: ...on at a specific point of pickup When the Start key is pressed and as a result the deck pickup clutch CL102 turns on the drive of the deck main motor M101 rotates the pickup roller to pickup paper At this time the pickup feed roller and the separation roller serve to make sure that only one sheet of paper is moved forward then when the deck pickup sensor PS101 detects the paper the deck pickup rol...

Страница 480: ...106 PS101 CL102 M101 SL101 DC controller PCB host machine Deck driver PCB Deck feed detection signal DPFD Deck pickup clutch drive signal DPUCD Deck pickup roller releasing solenoid drive signal DPRSD Deck main motor drive signal Deck pickup detection signal DPPD Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 481: ... 8 6 P 1 2 3 Sequence of Operations pickup from the deck F08 102 02 INTR LSTR STBY Deck main motor M101 Deck pickup clutch CL102 Deck pickup roller releasing solenoid SL101 Deck pickup sensor PS101 Deck feed sensor PS106 SCAN PRINT Start key ON Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 482: ...p roller assembly moves past the deck paper sensor the Add Paper message will be indicates in the control panel of the host machine F08 103 01 F08 103 02 1 3 2 Switching the Deck Paper Size The paper size of the deck may be switched by relocating the guide plate inside the deck to suit the needs of the user the new paper size must then be entered in service mode COPIER OPTION ACC DK P Deck paper s...

Страница 483: ...tment it can also indicate the detected level in the control panel of its host machine The following shows how the level is determined with reference to the combination of the states of sensors and how each level is indicated Level of paper 100 to about 50 about 50 to about 10 less than 10 No paper 1 light blocking plate over the sensor 0 light blocking plate not over the sensor T08 103 01 PS102 1...

Страница 484: ...r on the lifter If the lifter fails to stop moving up after the sensor lever blocks the deck lifter position sensor for some reason the deck lifter upper limit sensor PS103 will turn on to prevent damage otherwise caused by the deck The lifter on the other hand starts to move down when the deck open switch SW100 is pushed it continues to move down unit it moves past the sensor lever of the deck pa...

Страница 485: ... Deck separation roller Lifter Deck lifter motor Deck main motor Deck OPEN detecting switch SW101 Deck paper supply position sensor PS107 Deck lifter position sensor PS104 Deck liter upper limit sensor PS103 Deck open switch SW100 Deck lifter lower limit detecting switch SW102 Deck lifter cable Deck paper level sensor PS108 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 486: ...e display window in the deck front cover in keeping with the movement of the rack When the level of paper decreases and as a result the lifter moves to pickup position the area of the black belt within the display window increases while the area of white indicat ing the amount of paper decreases enabling a check on the level of paper F08 104 02 M102 Black belt Rack Display window Deck lifter motor...

Страница 487: ... the light blocking plate of the compartment and the lifter is let to move up to pickup position When the deck lifter motor rotates for opening or closing the deck the deck open indica tor LED100 located on the open switch PCB remains on or flashes F08 105 01 Deck lifter lower limit detection signal DLLD J08 8 Deck lifter motor drive signal J08 M102 DC controller PCB Deck driver PCB Deck lifter De...

Страница 488: ...k open switch ON Deck open indicator LED100 Deck lifter motor M102 Deck paper supply position sensor PS107 Deck open detecting switch SW101 Deck open solenoid SL1020 Deck lifter position sensor PS104 Deck lifter DOWN Deck lifter UP Compartment set Varies depending on the size of the stack Deck lifter lower limit detecting switch SW102 Deck open sensor PS109 Download Free Service Manual at http pri...

Страница 489: ... Off the Motor The deck main motor is turned on or off by controlling the output of the pulse signals from the host machine DMMA DMMA DMMB DMMB b Changing the Speed of Rotation of the Motor The deck is designed to automatically change the speed at which paper is moved in con sideration of future models of its host machine As such its speed is changed by the motor clock signals M CLK arriving at th...

Страница 490: ...5 may be checked in service mode COPIER DISPLAY ALARM1 BODY 1 Conditions for Moving Up the Lifter The lifter is connected to its host machine i e the deck set signal DSET is 1 The compartment is closed i e the deck open detection signal DOPND is 1 The compartment is closed i e the deck open detecting switch is ON The deck lifter upper limit detection signal DLUL is 0 and in addition the deck lifte...

Страница 491: ...ch SW102 Deck lifter lower limit detection signal DLLD PS109 Deck open sensor PS103 Deck lifter upper limit sensor Deck open signal DOPN Deck open detection signal DOPD Deck lifter motor drive signal DLMON Deck lifter UP signal DLUP Deck lifter motor UP drive signal Deck lifter motor DOWN drive signal Commu nication conver sion IC Q16 Note The communication conversion IC Q16 in the diagram perform...

Страница 492: ...rs at such times as programmed in the DC controller of the host machine When the DC controller of the host machine identifies a jam the machine will discharge all sheets moving ahead of the jam and then stop operation at which time it will show in structions on jam removal in the control panel of its host machine F08 201 01 Notation Name Function PS106 Deck feed sensor Detects delay PS101 Deck pic...

Страница 493: ...ons 1 When the host machine is turned on or at the end of wait up or in standby paper exits over the deck feed sensor PS106 Deck Pickup Vertical Path Delay Jam F08 201 02 Start key ON Jam indicator ON INTR SCAN PRINT Deck pickup clutch CL102 Jam check Deck pickup sensor PS101 Deck feed sensor PS106 Deck main motor M101 Normal Error Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 494: ...ted assemble the machine by reversing the steps used to disas semble it 3 Identify the screws by type length diameter and location 4 Some mounting screws are equipped with a toothed washer to protect against static elec tricity Be sure to use each washer 5 As a rule do not operate the machine while any of its parts are removed 6 If the deck is equipped with a drier heater be sure to disconnect the...

Страница 495: ...over 3 Compartment open close switch 4 Front cover 5 Right cover 6 Upper cover 7 Rear cover F08 301 01 3 1 1 Removing the Front Cover 1 Disconnect the deck from its host ma chine then push down the latch plate 2 of the compartment 1 with your finger to open the compartment 1 F08 301 02 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 rear 1 2 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 496: ... PAPER DECK 8 21 P 2 Loosen the four screws 3 and detach the front cover 4 to the front F08 301 03 When mounting the front cover to the deck be sure to match it against the coupling for the pa per level indicator F08 301 04 3 4 Match Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 497: ...ve the deck lifter to its lower limit and then move the drive belt in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure to the right until it stops so that the area of white increase then mount the front cover If the deck is operated without matching the paper level indica tor and the deck lifter position the drive mechanisms of the pa per level indicator can suffer damage F08 301 06 Front View Displ...

Страница 498: ...ar Cover 1 Disconnect the deck from the host ma chine and remove the six screws 1 then detach the rear cover 2 F08 301 07 3 1 3 Removing the Right Cover 1 Remove the three screws 1 then shift the right cover 2 to the front and de tach it to the rear F08 301 08 1 1 1 2 2 1 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 499: ...n the latch plate 2 of the compartment 1 with your finger to open the compartment 1 F08 301 09 3 Remove the three screws 3 and dis connect the connector 4 then remove the front upper cover 5 F08 301 10 4 Close the deck vertical path assembly and remove the two screws 6 then detach the upper cover 7 F08 301 11 rear 1 2 3 4 5 7 6 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 500: ...al Descriptions 3 2 1 Disconnecting the Deck from the Host Machine 1 Place a stack of copy paper 3 about 8 cm in height on the floor for the deck 2 to prevent deforming the roll sup port plate 1 F08 302 01 2 Remove the right cover See p 8 23P about 8 cm 2 3 3 1 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 501: ...0 CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK 8 26 P 3 Remove the four screws 5 and detach the deck 6 from the deck base 7 F08 302 02 4 Holding the deck 8 as shown place it on the stack of paper prepared in step 1 F08 302 03 left 5 7 right 6 5 8 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 502: ... stack of copy paper 3 about 8 cm in height on the floor for the deck 2 to prevent deforming the roll sup port plate 1 F08 302 04 2 Disconnect the deck from the host ma chine and push down the latch plate 5 of the compartment 4 to open the compartment 4 F08 302 05 about 8 cm 2 3 1 3 rear 5 4 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 503: ...t cover See p 8 23P 5 Remove the screw 9 of the harness guide and disconnect the connector 10 then remove the three screws 12 each left right of the compartment rails 11 Then while lifting the com partment 8 slightly detach it to the front 6 Place the compartment 8 on the stack of paper prepared in step 1 F08 302 07 left rear of the compartment 7 6 8 9 12 11 12 10 8 Download Free Service Manual at...

Страница 504: ...e host machine then push down the sen sor lever 2 of the paper supply posi tion sensor located inside the compart ment 1 to move the lifter to its lower limit F08 302 08 3 Remove the screw 3 and mount the paper rear end guide plate 4 to suit the new paper size 4 Remove the front cover 5 Remove the screw 5 and mount the left right guide plate 6 to suit the new paper size 6 Enter the new paper size ...

Страница 505: ...time use the index 3 on the latch plate as a refer ence F08 302 10 3 2 5 Adjusting the Roll Position If the compartment cannot be opened closed smoothly requiring adjustment of the roll located at the front of the deck per form the following 1 Remove the front cover See p 8 20P 2 While keeping the compartment fully slid out adjust the four mounting screws 4 on the roll support plate 3 so that the ...

Страница 506: ...utch be sure to engage the clutch with the stop ring 4 In addition be sure to hook the harness on the U groove 5 of the guide F08 303 01 3 3 2 Removing the Deck Main Motor M101 1 Disconnect the deck from its host ma chine and remove the six screws then detach the rear cover 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and re move the two screws 2 then remove the deck main motor At this time take care not to damag...

Страница 507: ...host machine if the lifter of the deck is up push the sensor lever 1 of the paper supply position sensor found inside the compartment with your finger to move the lifter 2 about 7 cm from the base plate of the compartment Then insert a hex wrench into the hole of the lifter drive shaft 3 to hold the shaft in place F08 303 03 F08 303 04 1 2 a b o u t 7 c m 2 3 4 Download Free Service Manual at http...

Страница 508: ... the deck 1 Open the compartment of the deck and remove all paper 2 Remove the screw and detach the paper rear end guide plate from inside the compartment 3 Push down the sensor lever 1 of the paper supply position sensor inside the compartment to move down the lifter until the left right hole in the compart ment side plate and the left right hole in the lifter match then insert two long screwdriv...

Страница 509: ...ve the two screws 8 and remove the cable fixing plate 9 on the left then detach the lifter cable 10 8 Remove the two screws 11 and the cable fixing plate 12 on the right then detach the lifter cable 13 9 If you are removing the lifter cable 13 found inside from the pulley 14 also found inside remove the two set screws 16 of the pulley 15 found on the out side and detach the pulley 15 also found on...

Страница 510: ... left right hole in the compartment side plate and the left right hole in the lifer match then insert two long screw drivers 2 At this time try matching the top surface of the lifter with the marking on the left side plate of the compartment to facilitate the work 4 Remove the compartment See p 8 27P 5 Remove the screw 3 and detach the sensor plate 4 6 Remove the screw 5 and detach the upper lower...

Страница 511: ...he home in the lifter drive shaft 10 to hold it in place If you failed to hold the lifter drive shaft as shown the lifter cable will become slack when you move the lifter motor unit F08 303 12 9 Remove the five screws 12 and detach the lifter motor unit 13 F08 303 13 10 11 12 12 13 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 512: ...of the lifter drive shaft then wind the cable along the groove of the pulley about 1 5 times by hand At this time try to keep the lifter cable taut i e the long screwdrivers used to hold the lifter in position are lifted slightly by the lifter cable 5 Secure the pulley to the lifter drive shaft with two set screws 6 6 Secure all pulleys you have removed to the lifter drive shaft then measure the d...

Страница 513: ...and remove the five screws 2 3 Remove the deck pickup unit 3 F08 304 01 When mounting the deck pickup unit 3 be sure to se cure the three screws shown F08 304 02 3 4 2 Removing the Deck Pickup Roller 1 Remove the deck pickup unit See p 8 38P 2 Turn over the deck pickup unit and re move the two resin rings 1 then de tach the deck pickup rollers 2 F08 304 03 1 2 2 2 3 Screws 3 2 1 Download Free Serv...

Страница 514: ...up roller 4 at the rear of the machine be sure that the marking 5 found on the side of the roller and the marking 6 found on the col lar silver are toward the rear of the ma chine F08 304 05 3 4 4 Removing the Deck Pickup Feed Roller 1 Remove the deck pickup unit See p 8 38P 2 Turn over the deck pickup unit 3 Remove the resin ring 1 and detach the deck pickup feed roller 2 and the drive belt 3 tow...

Страница 515: ...the front of the machine The pickup feed roller rubber may be attached to the pickup feed roller shaft in any orien tation F08 304 07 3 4 6 Removing the Deck Separation Roller 1 Disconnect the deck from the host ma chine then remove the two screws 1 and detach the separation roller support plate 2 2 Remove the joint and detach the deck separation roller 3 F08 304 08 F08 304 09 1 2 1 2 3 Download F...

Страница 516: ...l characteristic of urethane sponge not affecting its quality Multiple parts do not exist dis tinguished by color 3 4 7 Adjusting the Pressure of the Deck Separation Roller If pickup failure or double feeding occurs when the deck is used adjust the position of the pressure sponge of the deck separation roller If pickup failure occurs move the spring in the direction of arrow A If double feeding oc...

Страница 517: ... two fix ing screws 2 of the solenoid with refer ence to the index on the support plate be fore removing the deck pickup roller releas ing solenoid 1 from the support plate or mark the position of the solenoid on the support plate with a scriber If the solenoid is to be mounted on its own be sure to locate it in its initial posi tion F08 304 11 1 2 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blo...

Страница 518: ...en remove the six screws and detach the rear cover 2 Disconnect the eight connectors 1 and remove the four screws 2 then detach the deck driver PCB 3 F08 305 01 3 5 2 Removing the Open Switch PCB 1 Disconnect the deck from the host ma chine and push the latch plate 2 of the compartment 1 with your finger to open the compartment F08 305 02 1 2 2 2 3 rear 2 1 Download Free Service Manual at http pri...

Страница 519: ... connect the connector 4 then detach the front upper cover 5 F08 305 03 3 Remove the two screws 6 and detach the open switch PCB 7 When mounting the upper front cover be sure to avoid biting the harness by the open switch PCB or forgetting to connect the connectors F08 305 04 3 4 5 7 6 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 520: ...COPYRIGHT 2000 CANON INC 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000 iR6000 REV 0 JULY 2000 CHAPTER 9 SHIFT TRAY Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 521: ...Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 522: ...t by coil springs descent by weight of paper Shift by motor A3 A4 A4R A5R B4 B5 B5R 11 17 LTR LTR R LGL STMT R postcard transparency 64 to 200 g m2 By group 55 mm Sort 500 sheets paper of 64 g m2 Non sort 250 sheets paper of 64 g m2 Sort 50 mm or less direction of delivery 20 mm or more direction of shift stack to stack stack 5 mm or less direction of shift within stack Non sort 100 mm or less Of ...

Страница 523: ...AY 9 2 P 1 Tray 2 Limit sensor front 3 Limit sensor rear 4 Tray drive unit 5 Shift tray driver PCB 2 Names of Parts 10 5 1 7 3 8 2 6 9 4 F09 201 01 6 HP sensor front 7 HP sensor rear 8 Light blocking plate 9 Tray paper sensor 10 Delivery unit Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 524: ...e shift motor in response to the shift control signal from the host machine and provides the host machine with various sensor signals for con trol of shifting operations F09 301 01 Shift tray driver PCB Motor drive circuit J102 J101 J201 J202 Motor control signal Sensor signal A24V A5V To host machine To host machine Various sensors Shift motor M Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogs...

Страница 525: ... STHPL When the tray is in HP at front 1 When the tray is in HP at rear 1 5V Tray paper sensor PS103 J104 6 5 4 SPEXIST J205 N C N C 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 When paper is put on tray 0 5V 5V Limit sensor rear PS104 J104 3 2 1 SPCFULL When paper exceeds limit 0 When paper exceeds limit 0 24 V on SDCM1 moves tray to front 24 V on SDCM2 moves tray to rear Limit sensor front PS105 J106 3 2 1 D_SENS3 Shift mot...

Страница 526: ... controlled by the HP sensors mounted to the front and the rear F09 401 01 4 2 Stacking The machine s tray is supported by coil springs and the tray moves down under the weight of the paper deposited on it The stack is monitored by limit sensors reflecting type photosensors when the stack reaches a specific height the shift tray driver PCB sends the FULL signal to the host machine F09 402 01 Light...

Страница 527: ...by the tray paper sensor mounted on the tray F09 403 01 4 4 Delivery The sheets delivered by the host machine is moved through the delivery unit and then de posited on the tray The delivery unit assembly is driven by the delivery motor through gears of the host machine s delivery assembly F09 404 01 Tray paper sensor PS103 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 528: ...st machine s main power switch 2 Remove the delivery unit from the main machine Keep the tray connected to the host machine 3 Temporarily fix the limit sensor font rear at the point farthest from the paper 4 Place a stack of 60 mm in height on the shift tray where either of the limit sensors can detect it 5 Turn off the host machine s main power switch then select STCK LIMIT and press the OK key 6...

Страница 529: ...t rear be sure to start at the point farthest from the paper moving closer to the sensor 2 The grounding wire terminal of the limit sensor front rear must be level in relation to the sensor as shown in addition make sure that the bend of the terminal must face downward F09 501 02 Grounding wire terminal Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 530: ...ed by reversing the steps used to disassemble it 3 The screws must be identified by type length diameter and location 4 The mounting screw of the grounding wire and the varistors is equipped with a toothed washer to ensure electrical continuity They must not be left out when fitting the screws 5 As a rule the machine must not be operated with any of its parts removed 6 The front door switch or the...

Страница 531: ...ray from the machine 2 Release the two retaining claws 1 and detach the cable retaining plate 2 F09 601 01 3 Remove the two screws 3 and detach the two limit sensors 4 and the two grounding wires 4 Free the cable of the limit sensor from the cable clamp 5 and disconnect the connector 6 F09 601 02 1 2 3 4 4 5 6 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 532: ...y 9 F09 601 03 6 Pull off the shaft 10 from the tray drive assembly and remove the three screws 11 then detach the shielding cover 12 F09 601 04 7 Remove the four screws 13 and de tach the shift tray driver PCB 14 Points to Note When Mounting Be sure to adjust the position of the limit sensor front rear see 5 1 Adjusting the Limit sensor Position F09 601 05 7 8 8 9 11 12 10 13 14 Download Free Ser...

Страница 533: ...s 1 through 6 to detach the shift tray driver PCB 2 Remove the two screws 15 and dis connect the connector 16 then detach the tray drive unit 17 Points to Note When Mounting Be sure to adjust the position of the limit sensor front rear see 5 1 Adjusting the Limit sensor Position F09 602 01 15 16 17 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 534: ...COPYRIGHT 2000 CANON INC 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000 iR6000 REV 0 JULY 2000 TROUBLESHOOTING Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 535: ...Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 536: ...on the Printer Unit 2 2 2 3T 4 Making Checks on the Reader Unit 2 4T CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS 1 Image Adjustments 3 1T 1 1 Standards of Image Position 3 1T 1 2 Checking the Image Position 3 2T 1 3 Adjusting the Left Right Image Margin 3 2T 1 3 1 Cassette 3 4 3 2T 1 3 2 Left Right Front Deck 3 3T 1 3 3 Manual Feed Tray 3 3T 1 3 4 Duplex Feeding Unit 3 4T 1 3 5 Side Paper Deck 3 4T 1 4 Ad...

Страница 537: ...d SL7 3 18T 4 13 Adjusting the Position of the Reversing Flapper Solenoid SL8 3 18T 4 14 Adjusting the Position of the Fixing Web Solenoid SL9 3 19T 4 14 1 New Fixing Web 3 19T 4 14 2 Existing Fixing Web 3 19T 4 15 Position of the Side Paper Deck Pickup Roller Releasing Solenoid 3 20T 4 16 Attaching the Timing Belt of the Manual Feed Tray Assembly 3 20T 4 17 Attaching the Drive Belt 3 21T 5 Fixing...

Страница 538: ...ooting Image Faults 4 5T 3 1 The image is too light halftone 4 5T 3 2 The print is too light including solid black area 4 6T 3 3 The print is too light overall appreciably 4 6T 3 4 The print has uneven density darker at front 4 7T 3 5 The print has uneven density lighter at front 4 7T 3 6 The print is foggy overall 4 8T 3 7 The print if foggy vertically 4 9T 3 8 The print has black lines vertical ...

Страница 539: ...2 1 AC power is absent 4 38T 4 2 2 DC power is absent 4 38T 4 2 3 Pickup fails 4 39T 4 2 4 The lifter fails to move up pickup from front deck 4 41T 4 2 5 The lifter fails to move up pickup from cassette 4 41T 4 2 6 Pickup fails manual feed 4 42T 4 2 7 The vertical path roller fails to rotate 4 43T 4 2 8 The registration roller fails to operate 4 44T 4 2 9 The No 1 mirror mount fails to operate 4 4...

Страница 540: ...ps Heaters and Others 4 70T 6 6 1 Reader Unit 4 71T 6 6 2 Printer Unit 4 71T 6 7 PCBs 4 72T 6 7 1 Reader Unit 4 73T 6 7 2 Printer unit 4 73T 6 8 Variable Resistors VR Light Emitting Diodes LED and Check Pins by PCB 4 74T 6 8 1 Main Controller PCB 4 74T 6 8 2 DC Controller PCB 4 75T 6 8 3 Reader Controller PCB 4 76T 6 8 4 Power Supply PCB 4 76T 6 8 5 HVT PCB 4 77T 6 8 6 Drum Heater Control PCB 4 77...

Страница 541: ... TEST test print mode 5 94T 8 COUNTER counter mode 5 98T CHAPTER 6 SELF DIAGNOSIS 1 3 Self Diagnosis of the Finisher 6 14T 1 4 Self Diagnosis of the Saddle Stitcher 6 18T APPENDIX A GENERAL TIMING CHART A 1 B LIST OF SIGNALS ABBREVIA TIONS A 3 C General Circuit Diagram A 9 D PAPER DECK G1 GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM A 11 E SHIFT TRAY GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM A 12 F List of Special Tools A 13 G List of ...

Страница 542: ...COPYRIGHT 2000 CANON INC 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000 iR6000 REV 0 JULY 2000 CHAPTER 1 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 543: ...Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 544: ...performance Once they fail the consequences are likely to be consider able Whenever possible schedule the replacement to coincide with a scheduled visit to the user s 1 1 Guide to Timing of Replacement You can check the timing of replacement for periodically replaced parts in service mode COPIER COUNTER PRDC 1 1 2 Reader Unit The reader unit does not have parts that require periodical replacement ...

Страница 545: ...engthened polish cleaner 1 type blue 6 Transfer charging wire FF5 6884 1 500 000 Strengthened polish cleaner 2 type blue 7 Separation charging wire FF5 3090 1 500 000 cleaner 8 Pre transfer charging wire FF5 3090 1 500 000 cleaner 9 Main thermistor FH7 7529 1 500 000 10 Sub thermistor FG5 8812 1 500 000 11 Ozone filter FB5 5570 1 500 000 12 Thermal switch FH7 7154 1 1 000 000 Do not use the old ty...

Страница 546: ... replacement because of wear or damage once or more over the period of machine warranty Replace them when they fail 2 1 Guide to Timing of Replacement You can check the timing of replacement for durables in service mode COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 2 2 Reader Unit The reader unit does not have parts that are classified as consumables or durables Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 547: ...1867 1 500 000 assembly scraper 8 Fixing upper roller FB4 3690 1 500 000 9 Fixing lower roller FB5 3619 1 500 000 10 Fixing web FY1 1157 1 500 000 11 Insulating bush front rear FB5 3613 2 500 000 Replace simultaneously with fixing upper roller 12 Delivery upper separation claw FB5 3625 6 500 000 13 Delivery lower separation claw FA2 9037 2 1 000 000 14 Developing cylinder FG5 8235 1 1 000 000 15 D...

Страница 548: ...TION 1 5 T 2 4 Side Paper Deck As of June 2000 No Part name Part No Q ty Life Remarks 1 Pickup roller front FF5 1220 1 250 000 2 Pickup roller rear FF5 1221 1 250 000 3 Feeding roller FF5 9779 1 250 000 4 Separation roller FB2 7777 020 1 250 000 T01 204 01 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 549: ...eral condition 2 Record the counter reading check faulty prints 3 Make test prints and check the following 1 image density against standards 2 white background for soiling 3 characters for clarity 4 margin 5 fixing registration for displacement and back for soiling Then check the margins against standards single sided for leading edge 4 0 1 5 1 0 mm for left right 2 5 1 5 mm for trailing edge 2 0 ...

Страница 550: ...egular type brown holder 3 If you have replaced the primary transfer charging wire be sure to execute wire clean ing in service mode T01 301 01 5 Clean the optical system with a blower brush if the dirt is excessive use alcohol 1 No 1 2 3 mirror 2 Dust proof glass 3 Scanning reflecting plate 4 Standard white plate 6 Perform the following for the optical path 1 For the scanner drive check the cable...

Страница 551: ...e scraper 13 Clean the copyboard glass and the reading glass 14 Make test prints 15 Make sample prints 16 Check the operation of the leakage breaker While the power switch is on press the test switch of the leakage breaker to see that it oper ates normally i e the lever shifts to OFF and the power is cut If it does not operate normally replace it and make a check once again To reset After checking...

Страница 552: ...50 000 inpection adjustment Optical Scanner rail Silicone oil path FY9 6011 Copyboard glass No 1 through No 3 mirrors Scanner reflecting plate 4 2 Printer Unit Clean Replace Lubricate Adjust Inspect Intervals Unit Part Upon every every every every Remarks installation 250 000 500 000 750 0001 000 000 Externals Ozone filter controls FM3 Dust proofing Remove dust filter FM2 from surface Laser Dust p...

Страница 553: ...tion Grid wire primary Charging assembly shielding plate each charging assembly Roller electrode Primary anti stray toner sheet Photosensi Photosensitive Use alcohol tive drum drum and drum cleaning pow der CK 0429 for in structions see 6 Cleaning the Photo sensitive Drum Electrode for Clean with slip ring of alcohol 1 electrode drum heater 2 protruding wall of elec trode where FY9 6008 is applied...

Страница 554: ...ng Anti stray assembly toner sheet Cleaner Side scraper Toner dish rear front Fixing Inlet guide assembly Web Oil dish Thermistor Sub thermistor Thermal switch Delivery Separation assembly claw upper lower Waste toner Waste toner Inspect case collection box and remove area toner Pickup Transfer guide feeding Registration assembly roller upper lower Feeding belt Feeding rollers Download Free Servic...

Страница 555: ...ower brush if dirt is excessive dry wipe with lint free paper No 1 through No 3 mirrors Scanning lamp Feeding assembly Clean with a moist cloth see Note 1 Developing assembly base Clean with a moist cloth see Note 1 Note 1 Do to leave traces of water 5 Points to Note for Periodical Servicing Unless otherwise instructed clean with lint free paper and alcohol Make a thorough check of the block front...

Страница 556: ...free paper rela tively strongly against the photosensi tive drum wipe the surface of the drum from the front to the rear and from the rear to the front F01 601 01 Keep the widths of cleaning to 5 to 10 cm in the peripheral direction of the drum Move the lint free paper back and forth 15 to 20 times over a single area Forcing the lint free paper will not affect the life of the drum 5 When the alcoh...

Страница 557: ...Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 558: ...COPYRIGHT 2000 CANON INC 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000 iR6000 REV 0 JULY 2000 CHAPTER 2 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT BASIC PROCEDURE Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 559: ...Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 560: ...g 1 Primary charging assembly grid wire 2 Primary charging wire 3 Pre transfer charging wire 4 Transfer charging wire If a fault is found on printer images If a fault is found on copy images Output Conditions F value 5 potential control ON Perform 2 Making Checks on the Printer Unit Perform 4 Making Checks on the Reader Unit YES NO Are the test prints normal Points to Note When Making Checks on th...

Страница 561: ...sensitive drum Check the following and replace them if necessary 1 Laser for output 2 Potential control system 3 Photosensitive drum Check the primary charging system and the potential control system if normal replace the photosensitive drum Clean the following also check for foreign matter 1 Dust proofing glass 2 Charging assemblies 1 If there still is a difference in density after giving the adj...

Страница 562: ...ce mode COPIER DISPLAY DPOT VL2M for copier image COPIER DISPLAY DPOT VL2M P for printer image Check the following readings in service mode COPIER DISPLAY DPOT VDM for copier image COPIER DISPLAY DPOT VDM P for printer image Check the following and replace them if necessary 1 Laser for output 2 Potential control system 3 Photosensitive drum Check the following and replace them if necessary 1 Laser...

Страница 563: ...f gray scale No 1 solid black too low light Make a copy of the NA3 Chart in text mode Is the white background foggy Is the white background foggy Is the density of gray scale No 8 halftone different If it is too dark If it is too light Perform the instructions under nChecking for Fogging g on the printer side YES NO NO YES Make a copy of the NA3 Chart in AE mode Is the output foggy Is the white ba...

Страница 564: ...COPYRIGHT 2000 CANON INC 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000 iR6000 REV 0 JULY 2000 CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 565: ...Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 566: ...ition The image margin non image width of a print made in Direct must be as follows F03 101 01 Image Leading Edge Margin F03 101 02 Left Right Image Margin F03 101 04 Left Right Non Image Width F03 101 03 Leading Edge Non Image Width 1 5mm 1 0mm 4 0 2 5 1 5mm 0 2 4 6 8 10 1 5mm 1 0mm 4 0 2 5mm 1 5 0 2 4 6 8 10 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 567: ...ion 2 Adjusting the image leading edge margin registration 3 Adjusting the left right non image width CCD read start position 4 Leading edge non image width scanner image leading edge position 1 3 Adjusting the Left Right Image Margin 1 3 1 Cassette 3 4 1 Loosen the two fixing screws 1 found on the left and the right of the cassette F03 103 01 2 Remove the paper size plate 2 and turn the adjusting...

Страница 568: ...d the two fixing screws 3 of the cassette front cover 1 F03 103 03 2 Move the cassette guide assembly front 4 to the front or the rear to make adjustments F03 103 04 1 3 3 Manual Feed Tray 1 Loosen the two mounting screws 1 of the manual feed tray and adjust the po sition of the manual feed tray F03 103 05 1 2 2 3 2 3 4 1 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 569: ...e out the compartment and turn the two screws to adjust the position of the latch plate of the deck open solenoid At this time use the index on the latch plate as a guide F03 103 07 2 5mm 2 0 Increasing the ADJ REFE setting An increase by 23 will increase the margin by 1 mm Decreasing the ADF REFE setting A decrease by 23 will ecrease the margin by 1 mm 0 2 4 6 8 10 0 2 4 6 8 10 Edge of paper Scre...

Страница 570: ... non image width in service mode so that it is as indicated COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY ADJ Y F03 105 01 Edge of paper Decreasing the REGIST setting A decrease by 10 will increase the margin by 1 mm Increasing the REGIST setting An increase by 10 will decrease the margin by 1 mm 2 5mm 2 0 Edge of image Increasing the ADJ Y setting An increase by 12 will increase the non image width by 1 mm Decreasing the...

Страница 571: ...n Image Width 1 Adjust the non image width in service mode so that it is as indicated COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY ADJ X F03 106 01 Image leading edge Decreasing the ADJ X setting A decrease by 12 will decrease the width by 1 mm Increasing the ADJ X setting An increase by 12 will increase the width by 1 mm Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 572: ... 1 Replacing the Scanner Drive Cable See the Reader Manual Chap 2 5 Disassembly Assembly 2 2 Adjusting the Position of the Scanner Mirror Base See the Reader Manual Chap 2 5 Disassembly Assembly 2 3 After Replacing the Scanning Lamp See the Reader Manual Chap 2 5 Disassembly Assembly Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 573: ...unting the Drum Cleaning Blade See the Printer Manual Chap 4 7 11 Drum Cleaner 3 4 Mounting the Developing Blade See the Printer Manual Chap 4 7 8 Developing Assembly 3 5 Replacing the Potential Sensor Potential Control PCB See the Printer Unit Chap 4 7 4 Potential Sensor Assembly 1 The potential sensor and the potential control PCB are adjusted as a single unit be sure to replace both at the same...

Страница 574: ... to the pickup assembly make sure that the round marking 2 found on the side of the roller and the round marking 3 found on the collar gold colored are toward the front of the machine F03 401 01 The collar of the pickup roller used at the rear of the machine is silver colored When mounting the pickup roller 4 to the pickup assembly make sure that the round mark ing 5 found on the side o the roller...

Страница 575: ...tte 3 4 Right Pickup Assembly Left Deck Pickup Assembly F03 402 01 4 3 Orientation of the Feeding Roller of the Deck Cassette Pickup Assembly When mounting the feeding roller assembly of the deck cassette pickup assembly be sure the belt pulley 2 is toward the front of the machine F03 403 01 Wider groove Narrower groove front of machine rear of machine Wider groove Narrower groove 1 2 rear front D...

Страница 576: ...the pickup assembly be sure that the round mark ing 2 found on the collar silver colored is toward the front of the machine 1 Pickup roller 2 Marking on collar F03 404 01 The collar on the pickup roller found at the rear of the machine is gold colored When mounting the pickup roller 4 to the pickup assembly be sure that the round mark ing 5 found on the side of the roller and the round marking 6 f...

Страница 577: ...e Side Paper Deck When mounting the feeding roller assembly 1 to the side paper deck be sure that the belt pulley 2 is toward the front of the machine When mounting the feeding roller 3 to the feeding roller shaft 4 be sure that the round marking 5 is toward the rear of the ma chine F03 405 01 front 3 4 2 1 5 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 578: ...ding or pickup failure occurs during pickup change the position of the pres sure spring of the separation roller If double feeding occurs move the hook of the spring in the direction of B If pickup failure occurs move the hook of the spring in the direction of A 1 Feeding roller 2 Separation roller 3 Pressure lever 4 Pressure spring F03 406 01 1 2 3 4 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 ...

Страница 579: ...position of the pres sure spring of the separation roller 1 Remove the right upper cover 2 Remove the upper guide 1 F03 407 01 If double feeding occurs remove the mounting screw 2 and lower the mounting base 3 then tighten the mounting screw 2 in hole A If pickup failure occurs remove the mounting screw 2 and raise the mounting base 3 then tighten the mounting screw 3 in hole B F03 407 02 1 2 3 ho...

Страница 580: ... 4 8 Adjusting the Fixing Inlet Guide Solenoid SL1 Adjust the position of the solenoid using the two screws 1 so that the guide will be posi tioned as indicated when the solenoid turns on F03 408 01 3 2mm Upper roller Lower roller Solenoid Inlet guide 9 5mm 12 7mm 1 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 581: ...Position of the Pickup Solenoid SL3 SL4 of the Cassette 3 4 Adjust the position of the solenoid using the two screws 3 so that the distance from the bottom of the pickup assembly to A of the roller arm is 36 0 5 mm when 1 and 2 are op erated F03 409 01 1 2 1 2 A View from A 36 0 5mm 3 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 582: ...rew 2 using the screw 2 so that the drive lever 1 is pushed fully when the solenoid turns on i e when the plunger is drawn F03 410 01 4 11 Adjusting the Position of the Right Deck Pickup Solenoid SL6 Adjust the position of the solenoid so that the left edge of the arm 2 is 57 2 0 5 mm from the center of hole A of the solenoid mounting base F03 411 01 2 1 A 57 2 0 5mm Download Free Service Manual a...

Страница 583: ...o the fixing screw 2 of the solenoid Or mark the position for the solenoid by drawing a line on the support plate with a scriber When mounting the solenoid on its own be sure to secure it in its original position F03 412 01 4 13 Adjusting the Position of the Reversing Flapper Solenoid SL8 1 Adjust the potion of the solenoid so that the drive lever 1 is pushed fully when the so lenoid turns on i e ...

Страница 584: ... 2 so that the distance of travel of the drive lever 1 is 8 6 mm F03 414 01 4 14 2 Existing Fixing Web Before removing the solenoid take note of the position A of the drive lever when the solenoid turns on After replacing the solenoid adjust its position using the screw 2 so that the drive lever 1 will be positioned as it was before replacement when the solenoid turns on F03 414 02 8 6mm 1 2 A 1 2...

Страница 585: ...h reference to the index on the support plate Or draw a line on the support plate so that it will serve as a reference when positioning the solenoid When mounting the solenoid on its own be sure to secure it in its original position F03 415 01 4 16 Attaching the Timing Belt of the Manual Feed Tray Assembly 1 Butt the rack plate 1 of the manual feed tray against A open state 2 Move the slide volume...

Страница 586: ...00 REV 0 JULY 2000 CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS 3 21 T 4 17 Attaching the Drive Belt Attach the drive belt on the pulley and the rollers as indicated F03 417 01 Main drive belt Paper feed drive belt Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 587: ... to the holder 5 2 Position of the Fixing Inlet Guide Points to Note When Making Adjustments in the Field 1 For the position of the inlet guide see the instructions under 2 4 1 i e adjusting the po sition of the fixing inlet guide solenoid SL1 2 The inlet guide will move down when the solenoid SL1 turns on 3 The difference in the height of the inlet guide between front and rear must be within 0 5 ...

Страница 588: ...IER FUNCTION FIXING NIP CHK F03 503 01 5 3 2 Standards 1 Measure the width of a b and c a and c are points 10 mm from both edges of paper 2 Check to see if the measurements are as indicated Otherwise make the adjust ment under c Be sure that both upper and lower rollers are fully heated when taking measurements 5 3 3 Making Adjustments 1 Slide the fixing assembly out of the ma chine 2 Open the del...

Страница 589: ... 6 1 When Replacing the Scanner Unit If the temperature of the fixing assembly is 150 C or higher when the scanner unit is re placed force potential control in service mode 1 Make the following selections in service mode COPIER FUNCTION DPC DPC 2 Turn off and then on the main power switch Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 590: ...m on the service label COPIER ADJUST CCD all items 7 2 When Replacing the Reader controller PCB 1 Print out the data of user mode service mode 2 Replace the reader controller PCB 3 Remove the EEPROM 1 pc from the existing PCB and mount it to the new PCB 4 After assembling the machine connect the power plug to the power outlet and turn on the main power switch 5 Check to make sure that the followin...

Страница 591: ...4 When Replacing the HDD Unit When replacing the HDD unit be sure to keep the following in mind 1 Take appropriate measures against static charges 2 Keep the HDD unit protected from impact 1 Replace the HDD unit 2 After assembling the machine connect the power plug to the power outlet 3 Connect a PC to which the Service Support Tool has been installed 4 Turn on the PC and turn on the main power sw...

Страница 592: ...ce mode settings are the same as the data ob tained before replacing the PCB COPIER ADJUST LASER all items COPIER ADJUST DEVELOP all items except D HV DE COPIER ADJUST DENS all items COPIER ADJUST BLANK all items COPIER ADJUST V CONT all items COPIER ADJUST HV PRI all items COPIER ADJUST HV TR all items except D PRE TR and D HV TR COPIER ADJUST HV SP all items except D HV SP COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ...

Страница 593: ...voltage PCB 2 After assembling the machine connect the power plug and turn on the main power switch 3 Enter the values recorded on the label attached to the new high voltage PCB in the fol lowing service mode items COPIER ADJUST DEVELOP HVT DE COPIER ADJUST HV TR HVT TR COPIER ADJUST HV TR H PRE TR COPIER ADJUST HV SP HVT SP Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 594: ...rol system may be checked by disabling the auto control mechanism referred to hereafter as non auto control mode If improvements are noted in the images made in non auto control mode the potential measurement unit and the DC controller PCB may be suspected Further non auto control mode may also be made use of as an emergency measure against an error in the auto control mechanism In non auto contro...

Страница 595: ...ift circuit of the DC controller PCB 2 Method 2 for checking the potential measurement circuit 8 3 1 Method 1 1 Turn off the main power switch 2 Remove the rear upper cover 3 Short CP106 1 and CP105 2 on the DC controller PCB using a cable whose both ends are equipped with an alligator clip or a probe When shorting CP106 and CP105 be sure to keep the shorting tool away from other elements or the p...

Страница 596: ...controller PCB F03 803 03 7 Put the pickup feeding unit back into its initial position and fit the door switch tool in the door switch assembly then turn on the main power switch 8 Make the following selections in service mode and check to find out that the reading during initial rotation is between 0 and 30 COPIER DISPLAY DPOT DPOT K If the reading is not between 0 and 30 suspect a fault on the D...

Страница 597: ... auto control mode 2 Turn off the main power switch 3 Remove the potential sensor from the machine 4 Connect the connector of the potential controller to the connector on the machine side 5 Fit the electrode FY9 3012 2 designed for checking potential sensors to the potential sensor 1 F03 803 04 When fitting the electrode to the potential sensor be sure to keep the mag net of the electrode away fro...

Страница 598: ...t the reading during initial rotation is between 0 and 30 COPIER DISPLAY DPOT DPOT K REF 1 If the reading is as indicated for method 1 but is not so for method 2 suspect dirt on the or and a fault in the potential measurement unit 2 If the reading is as indicated for both method 1 and method 2 the sig nal paths and the operations from the potential sensor unit to the micro processor on the DC cont...

Страница 599: ...COPYRIGHT 2000 CANON INC 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000 iR6000 REV 0 JULY 2000 CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS 3 34 T Blank Page Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 600: ...a limit value YES Replace the photosensitive drum If the problem is not corrected go to the checking the laser output Make the following selections in service mode level of current of the primary charging assembly COPIER DISPLAY HV STS PRIMARY Convert the reading mA indicated during printing into a control voltage with reference to 8 5 Potential Control Conversion Table YES NO YES Is the differenc...

Страница 601: ...oltage TR CNT during printing of J102A 12 on the DC controller PCB 1 Check the transfer charging assembly for leakage 2 Make the following selections in service mode and try changing the setting COPIER OPTION BODY FUZZY 3 Try replacing paper Make the following selections in service mode level of current of transfer charging Convert the reading mA during printing into a control voltage based on 8 5...

Страница 602: ...8 3 60 1 295 45 24 407 55 3 65 1 286 48 26 404 51 3 70 1 277 52 28 401 47 3 75 1 268 56 30 398 43 3 80 1 260 60 33 396 40 3 85 1 251 63 35 393 36 3 90 1 242 67 37 390 32 3 95 1 233 71 39 387 28 4 00 1 225 75 41 385 25 4 05 1 216 78 43 382 21 4 10 1 207 82 45 379 17 4 15 1 198 86 47 376 13 4 20 1 190 90 49 374 10 4 25 1 181 93 51 371 6 4 30 1 172 97 53 368 2 4 35 1 163 101 55 365 1 4 40 1 155 105 5...

Страница 603: ...936 198 109 294 98 5 70 927 202 111 291 102 5 75 918 206 113 288 106 5 80 910 210 115 286 110 5 85 901 213 117 283 113 5 90 892 217 119 280 117 5 95 883 221 121 277 121 6 00 875 225 123 275 125 6 05 866 228 125 272 128 6 10 857 232 127 269 132 6 15 848 236 129 266 136 6 20 840 240 132 264 140 6 25 831 243 134 261 143 6 30 822 247 136 258 147 6 35 813 251 138 255 151 6 40 805 255 140 253 155 6 45 7...

Страница 604: ... 65 586 348 191 184 248 7 70 577 352 193 181 252 7 75 568 356 195 178 256 7 80 560 360 198 176 260 7 85 551 363 200 173 263 7 90 542 367 202 170 267 7 95 533 371 204 167 271 8 00 525 375 206 165 275 8 05 516 378 208 162 278 8 10 507 382 210 159 282 8 15 498 386 212 156 286 8 20 490 390 214 154 290 8 25 481 393 216 151 293 8 30 472 397 218 148 297 8 35 463 401 220 145 301 8 40 455 405 222 143 305 8...

Страница 605: ...236 498 274 74 398 9 70 227 502 276 71 402 9 75 218 506 278 68 406 9 80 210 510 280 66 410 9 85 201 513 282 63 413 9 90 192 517 284 60 417 9 95 183 521 286 57 421 10 00 175 525 288 55 425 10 05 166 528 290 52 428 10 10 157 532 292 49 432 10 15 148 536 294 46 436 10 20 140 540 297 44 440 10 25 131 543 299 41 443 10 30 122 547 301 38 447 10 35 113 551 303 35 451 10 40 105 555 305 33 455 10 45 96 558...

Страница 606: ...e than a temporary measure used until the replacement of the potential sensor 1 COPIER OPTION TEMPO F POT SW If the potential sensor has gone out of order and transfer separation faults occur as a re sult enter 1 2 COPIER OPTION TEMPO F POT D The above service mode item must be set to 1 0 if the user mainly uses originals with a low image ratio text oriented default 1 if the user mainly uses origi...

Страница 607: ... data A and data B if the difference is not as indicated replace the environment sensor difference between data A1 and data B1 0 5 difference between data A2 and data B2 0 20 7 Press the Reset key twice and turn off the main power switch 8 Detach the environment sensor tool and attach the environment sensor The environment sensor tool FY9 3014 is adjusted at the factory to high precision Be sure t...

Страница 608: ...e I O address to check and make checks as indicated Turning on and off the sensor can turn on the machine s motors Take full care 10 3 Check List Guide to Connector No D DC controller PCB R reader controller PCB Reader Unit service mode COPIER I O R CON Sensor Connector No Checks I O Voltage I O address display display PS39 R J5012 2 Move the No 1 mirror base Light blocking Present 1 5V Scanner HP...

Страница 609: ...he left deck Left deck Open 0 0V Left deck open closes sensor IO P03 12 Closed 1 5V PS10 D J115 A5 Put paper in the left deck Paper Present 1 5V Left deck lifter sensor IO P03 3 Absent 0 0V PS11 D J115 A8 Put paper in the left deck Paper Present 1 5V Left deck paper sensor IO P01 9 Absent 0 0V PS12 D J115 A2 Put paper in the left deck Paper Present 1 5V Left deck limit sensor IO P03 4 Absent 0 0V ...

Страница 610: ...cking Present 1 5V Vertical path 4 paper sensor IO P01 6 sensor lever plate Absent 0 0V PS28 D J113 B2 Put paper over the point of Paper Present 1 5V Laser write start sensor IO P02 8 detection Absent 0 0V PS29 D J106 A9 Put paper over the point of Paper Present 1 5V Registration paper sensor IO P01 1 detection Absent 0 0V PS30 D J107 B13 Put paper over the point of Paper Present 1 5V Duplex pre r...

Страница 611: ...Absent 0 0V PS47 D J115 B2 Remove the deck from the machine Light blocking Present 1 5V Right deck level upper sensor IO P05 8 and move the sensor lever plate Absent 0 0V PS48 D J115 B5 Remove the deck from the machine Light blocking Present 1 5V Right deck level lower sensor IO P05 12 and move the sensor lever plate Absent 0 0V PS49 D J115 B8 Remove the deck from the machine Light blocking Presen...

Страница 612: ...COPYRIGHT 2000 CANON INC 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000 iR6000 REV 0 JULY 2000 CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 613: ...Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 614: ...e problem is caused by the originals or the machine 1 The copy density is optimum when it is as indicated by the index 5 1 2 An original with a reddish background prevents good contrast e g red slips 3 Check the original for density Memo A diazo copy used as an original or an original with transparency tends to produce prints that are likely to be judged foggy An original prepared in pencil tends ...

Страница 615: ...sfer generating poor images Advise him her on the correct method of storing paper 1 7 Checking the Periodically Replaced Parts Check with the Scheduled Servicing Chart and the Periodically Replaced Parts Table if any part has reached the end of its life replace it 1 8 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure If the prints have uneven density difference in density between front and rear light im ages or fo...

Страница 616: ...Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 617: ...GHT 2000 CANON INC 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000 iR6000 REV 0 JULY 2000 4 4 T CHAPTER 2 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT BASIC PROCEDURE 2 Samples of Image Faults Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 618: ...djustment 1 Make prints in AE mode Is the density normal YES End Developing assembly 2 Are the rolls of the developing assembly in firm contact with the photo sensitive drum YES Check to see if the surface of the developing cylinder is coated with an even layer of toner NO Check to find out if the developing assembly locking unit is mounted correctly Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 b...

Страница 619: ...ES Check the control system of the developing bias Pre transfer charging assembly 3 Is the pre transfer charging assembly fitted securely NO Fit the charging assembly securely Transfer faults 4 Is the transfer separation charging assembly fitted securely NO Fit the transfer separation charging assembly securely 5 Try changing the setting of the following in service mode between 1 and 3 COPIER OPTI...

Страница 620: ...lace the DC controller PCB Developing assembly 2 Are the rolls of the developing assembly in firm contact with the photo sensitive drum NO Check to see if the developing assembly locking unit is mounted correctly 3 Is the surface of the developing cylinder coated with an even layer of toner NO 1 Clean the edge of the blade of the developing assembly dry wip ing 2 Clean the surface of the developin...

Страница 621: ...ons for the potential control mechanism in Chapter 3 Standards and Adjustments Photosensitive drum cleaner unit 2 Is the cleaning blade mounted correctly NO Mount the cleaning blade correctly Pre exposure lamp DC controller PCB 3 Is the pre exposure lamp on during printing NO 1 Replace the pre exposure lamp 2 Replace the DC controller PCB Developing assembly 4 Are the developing rolls worn YES Rep...

Страница 622: ... roller for dirt 2 Web for dirt Potential control system 3 Set 0 to the following in service mode to turn off potential control COPIER OPTION BODY PC CNT Is the problem corrected YES The problem is in the potential control system Make checks for the potential control system in Chapter 3 Standards and Adjust ments Primary charging assembly 4 Clean the primary charging wire grid wire and shielding p...

Страница 623: ...black lines 2 Web for dirt 3 Thermistor and separation claw for dirt and reciprocating opera tion Primary charging assembly 4 Clean the primary charging assembly Is the problem corrected YES End Photosensitive drum cleaner unit 5 Is there paper or foreign matter trapped in the cleaning blade assembly YES Remove the foreign matter and clean the cleaning blade and the casing of the cleaner unit 6 Ar...

Страница 624: ... the image Is it normal YES The cause is in a process after the fixing system Check the follow ing 1 Fixing assembly upper roller for offset Photosensitive drum 3 Are there scratches in the peripheral direction of the surface of the pho tosensitive drum that match the image YES Find out the cause of the scratches and replace the photosensitive drum Developing assembly 4 Is the surface of the devel...

Страница 625: ... YES Clean each charging wire Developing assembly Photosensitive drum 3 Does the problem occur at intervals of about 52 mm YES Check the developing assembly 1 Clean the developing rolls 2 Dry wipe the surface of the developing cylinder 3 If scratches are found on the surface of the developing cylinder re place the developing cylinder NO Check the photosensitive drum 1 Clean the photosensitive drum...

Страница 626: ... leakage of toner Drum cleaner 2 Is the paper feeding assembly soiled with toner YES 1 Clean the feeding assembly 2 Check the drum cleaner assembly for leakage of waste toner Fixing assembly 3 Is the fixing assembly lower roller soiled YES 1 Clean the fixing assembly lower roller 2 Clean the fixing assembly inlet guide 3 Check the fixing upper roller and the web for dirt NO Check the following 1 R...

Страница 627: ...a Set the source of paper cassette deck to Heavy Additional Function common settings store paper type source of paper Heavy b Advise the user to always use the selected source of paper after depositing thick paper whenever using thick paper 2 Is the paper of a recommended type NO Try using recommended paper If the results are good advise the user to use recommended paper Fixing assembly 3 Does the...

Страница 628: ...ly 2 Make prints using the following source of paper Is the displaced lead ing edge different 1 Let right front deck 2 Cassettes 3 Side paper deck 4 Duplex feeding assembly double sided print YES Check the source of paper in question for the following 1 Life of each roller 2 Paper lint on each roller 3 Dirt on the paper path Registration clutch Registration roller 3 Make adjustments in service mod...

Страница 629: ... Clean the surface of the scanner rail and apply a small amount of silicone oil so that the No 1 mirror base moves smoothly Photosensitive drum 5 Does the problem occur at intervals of about 250 mm YES 1 Check the drum gear 2 Check the ends of the drum in contact with the developing rolls for scratches and protrusions Drum drive gear 6 Does the problem occur at intervals of about 3 mm YES Check th...

Страница 630: ... Check the feeding system 3 20 The print has poor sharpness Reader assembly 1 Does the problem occur only in copy mages YES Go to step 2 NO Go to step 4 Copyboard glass 2 Is the copyboard glass coated with oil YES Clean the copyboard glass Mirrors 3 Is the horizontal reproduction on in copies made in Direct within stan dards NO Adjust the distance between No 1 mirror and No 2 mirror YES Clean the ...

Страница 631: ... assembly 2 Check the HVT PCB 3 Check the potential sensor and the potential control PCB Developing assembly locking unit 3 During printing is the developing assembly locked against the photo sensitive drum NO Check the mechanism of the developing assembly locking unit Developing assembly drive assembly 4 During copying is the developing assembly rotating NO Check the drive system for the developi...

Страница 632: ...step 3 Scanning lamp 2 Is the scanning lamp on NO See The scanning lamp fails to turn on YES Check the connection of the following PCBs if normal replace the PCB 1 CCDAP PCB 2 DC controller PCB Laser unit 3 Make the following selections in service mode COPIER DISPLAY MISC LPOWER Is the laser output present during printing NO Replace the laser unit YES 1 Replace the DC controller PCB 2 Replace the ...

Страница 633: ...ol Then turn on the main power switch Clear E000 and trun off and then on the main power switch Make the following in service mode COPIER I O DC CON Are bit 4 and bit 5 of IO P12 0 YES Check the wiring if normal replace the DC controller PCB NO Check the wiring if normal replace the AC driver PCB 4 1 2 E001 AC driver PCB fixing heater drive circuit short circuit 1 While keeping the main power swit...

Страница 634: ...he thermistor in even contact with the fixing upper roller NO Mount it correctly Main thermistor TH1 soiling 4 Clean the area of contact of the thermistor Is the problem cor rected YES End Main thermistor TH1 faulty 5 Try replacing the thermistor Is the problem corrected YES End Fixing heater H1 H2 DC controller PCB 6 Try replacing the heater Is the problem corrected YES End NO Replace the DC cont...

Страница 635: ... Replace the sensor YES Replace the DC controller PCB 4 1 7 E010 Connector 1 Is the connector of the main motor connected NO Connect the connector Main motor M2 DC controller PCB 2 When the Start key is pressed does the voltage between J108 A6 and J108 A8 on the DC controller PCB change from 0 to about 5 V YES Replace the main motor NO Check the wiring if normal replace the DC controller PCB 4 1 8...

Страница 636: ...CON Is bit 15 of IO P02 0 YES It is likely that the feedscrew inside the waste toner pipe is pre vented from rotating because of some fault If the outlet of the waste toner pipe is clogged with toner remove the waste toner drive unit and remove the toner If otherwise try turning the main motor clockwise by hand If the screw rotates wait and see what happens if the screw does not rotate replace the...

Страница 637: ...g assembly toner sensor General condition Hopper toner sensor TS2 4 Is the hopper adequately provided with toner NO Check the hopper toner sensor Hopper connector Hopper supply motor M10 5 Is the connection of the hopper connector normal NO Connect the connector securely YES Check the hopper supply motor 4 1 12 E032 Connector 1 Is the remote diagnostic device connected securely NO Connect it secur...

Страница 638: ...he DC controller PCB 4 1 15 E110 Connectors 1 Is the connector J116 on the DC controller PCB connected se curely NO Connect the connector securely Connector 2 Open the manual feed cover and remove the developing assembly locking plate Is the relay connector 5 pin behind the laser scan ner plate connected securely Do NOT detach the lid of the laser scanner unit NO Connect it securely Laser scanner ...

Страница 639: ...he EEPROMs IC104 brown IC105 red IC109 yellow IC110 green IC127 blue IC130 white EEPROMs 2 Are all EEPROMs securely connected to the sockets of the DC con troller PCB NO Connect them correctly Data 3 Execute the following in service mode COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR DC CON Is the problem cor rected Thereafter be sure to enter the service mode data once again YES Check the operation if normal end the work...

Страница 640: ... ADF read sensor Is the problem cor rected YES End Read sensor S2 3 Try replacing the ADF read sensor Is the problem corrected YES End ADF controller PCB Reader controller PCB 4 Try replacing the ADF controller PCB Is the problem corrected YES End NO Check the wiring if normal replace the reader controller PCB 4 1 20 E220 Wiring 1 Is the wiring from the xenon lamp to the reader controller PCB norm...

Страница 641: ...then on the power switch Is the problem corrected YES Check the operation once again if normal end the work Control panel CPU PCB Main controller PCB YES End NO Check the wiring if normal replace the main controller PCB 4 1 24 E248 EEPROMs 1 Are the EEPROMs connected securely to the sockets of the reader controller PCB NO Connect them securely Data faulty 2 Execute the following in service mode CO...

Страница 642: ...B 4 1 26 E601 a E601 0000 Wiring 1 Are the connection and the cable of the connector J1017 on the main controller PCB and the connector J1551 on the hard disk drive normal NO Correct the connection cable Hard disk drive HDD Main controller PCB 2 Try replacing the hard disk drive and downloading the system soft ware Is the problem corrected YES End NO Replace the main controller PCB b E601 0001 Wir...

Страница 643: ...Foreign object 1 Is there a foreign object that hinders the rotation of the fan in the rotating mechanism of the hard disk fan YES Remove the foreign object Connector 2 Is the connector J124 on the DC controller PCB connected se curely NO Connect it securely Hard disk fan FM7 DC controller PCB 3 Try replacing the hard disk fan Is the problem corrected YES End NO Check the wiring if normal replace ...

Страница 644: ...e problem corrected YES Check the operation once gain if normal end the work NO Replace the main controller PCB 4 1 31 E711 a E711 0001 Wrong operation 1 Turn off and then on the main power switch Is the problem cor rected YES Check the operation once again if normal end the work Connector ADF controller PCB 2 Is the interface cable between the ADF controller PCB and the reader controller PCB norm...

Страница 645: ...ected YES Check the operation once again if normal end the work Connector 2 Is the cable between the ADF controller PCB and the reader con troller PCB normal NO Correct the cable ADF controller PCB Reader controller PCB 3 Try replacing the ADF controller PCB Is the problem corrected YES End NO Replace the reader controller PCB 4 1 33 E713 Wrong operation 1 Turn off and then on the main power switc...

Страница 646: ... to a different coin vendor Is the problem corrected YES End NO Replace the main controller PCB 4 1 36 E732 Wrong operation 1 Turn off and then on the main power switch Is the problem cor rected YES Check the operation once again if normal end the work Connectors Reader controller PCB 2 Is the connection of the connector J1014 on the main controller PCB and the connector J5004 on the reader contro...

Страница 647: ...f the Network PCB and the connectors of the main controller PCB normal Further is the cable between these connectors normal NO Correct the connectors cable MAC address setting 4 Have the MAC address checked by the network administrator and reset it Is the problem corrected YES End LAN card Main controller PCB 5 Try replacing the Network PCB Is the problem corrected YES End NO Replace the main cont...

Страница 648: ...onnection if normal replace the RIP1 PCB YES Replace the main controller PCB 4 1 41 E743 Wrong operation 1 Turn off and then on the main power switch Is the problem cor rected YES Check the operation once again if normal end the work Connector Main controller PCB 2 Is the connection of the connector J1014 on the main controller PCB and the connector J5004 on the reader controller PCB nor mal Furth...

Страница 649: ...controller PCB 3 Try replacing the heat discharge fan Is the problem corrected YES End NO Check the wiring if normal replace the DC controller PCB b E805 0002 Foreign object 1 Is there a foreign object that hinders the rotation of the fan in the rotating mechanisms of the feeding fan YES Remove the foreign object Connector 2 Is the connector J109 on the DC controller PCB connected se curely NO Con...

Страница 650: ...y charging cool ing fan normal NO Mount the cooling fan correctly Connector 3 Is the connector J103 on the DC controller connected securely NO Connect the connector securely Primary charging cooling fan FM6 DC controller PCB 4 Try replacing the primary charging cooling fan Is the problem cor rected YES End NO Check the wiring if normal replace the DC controller PCB Download Free Service Manual at ...

Страница 651: ...leakage breaker to the marking Power cord Line noise filter LF1 4 Try replacing the power cord line filter Is the problem corrected NO Check the wiring of the AC power supply line and the connectors for poor contact Main power switch SW1 Wiring 5 Is the resistance 0Ω Ω Ω Ω Ω when the switch is turned on and Ω Ω Ω Ω Ω when the switch is turned off NO Replace the power switch YES Check the wring of ...

Страница 652: ...2 5 J4003 1 24VU3 5 J4006 1 24VU3 5 J4007 1 3 24VU4 5 J4010 1 24VU4 5 J4011 1 24VU4 5 J4013 2 24VA 7 5 However the above output voltages assume tolerances of 10 in the AC input power YES Check the wiring from the DC power supply PCB to each load NO Replace the DC power supply PCB 4 2 3 Pickup fails General condition 1 Slide out and then in the cassette Is the sound of the lifter falling and the li...

Страница 653: ...th upper motor 17 Vertical path lower motor 16 NO Check the wiring and the motor driver PCB if normal replace the motor Registration roller clutch 7 Is the leading edge of paper as far as the registration roller assem bly YES See The registration roller fails to rotate Pickup assembly 8 Open the right upper cover and the right lower cover and put pa per over the door switch When the Start key is p...

Страница 654: ... sensor PS12 4 Is the voltage of the following connectors on the DC controller PCB about 0 V Sensor Right deck limit sensor J112 B8 J112 B7 Left deck limit sensor J115 A2 J115 A1 NO Check the sensor flag and the wiring if normal replace the sensor Right deck lifter motor M5 Left deck lifter motor M4 DC controller PCB 5 Turn on the main power switch and set the meter range to 30 VDC then connect th...

Страница 655: ...ge to 30 VDC then connect the probe of the meter to GND and the probe to the following connectors from the DC controller PCB When the cassette is inserted does the voltage change from about 0 to 24 V Motor Cassette 3 lifter motor J105 11 GND Cassette 4 lifter motor J105 10 GND YES Check the wiring and the motor drive PCB if normal replace the motor NO Replace the DC controller PCB 4 2 6 Pickup fai...

Страница 656: ... roller fails to rotate Belt Gear Coupling 1 It the drive from the vertical path duplex feeding motor M25 transmitted to each vertical path roller through the belt gear and coupling NO Mount the belt gear and coupling correctly Vertical path duplex feeding motor M25 2 Execute code 15 by making the following selections in service mode COPIER FUNCTION PART CHK MTR Does the motor operate NO Check the...

Страница 657: ...ode change from 0 to 1 NO Check the wiring and the sensor flag if normal replace the sensor Registration roller clutch CL2 3 Execute code 5 by making the following selections in service mode COPIER FUNCTION PART CHK CL Does the clutch operate NO Check the wiring and fixing feeding relay PCB if normal replace the clutch DC controller PCB 4 Try replacing the DC controller PCB Is the problem correcte...

Страница 658: ... Pre exposure LED LA1 DC controller PCB 2 Set the meter range to 30 VDC Does the voltage between J103 A3 and J103 A4 GND on the DC controller PCB change from 0 to 24 V YES Check the wiring from the DC controller PCB to the pre exposure LED if normal replace the pre exposure LED NO Replace the DC controller PCB 4 2 11 The scanning lamp fails to turn on Lamp mounting 1 Is the scanning lamp mounted c...

Страница 659: ...connector J153 J158 4 Is the connection of the relay connector secure NO Connect it securely 4 2 13 The hopper supply motor M10 fails to operate General condition 1 Execute code 6 MTR ON in service mode COPIER FUNCTION PART CHK MTR Doe the motor oper ate Be sure to turn off the motor within about 10 sec to prevent clogging with toner NO Go to step 3 Hopper toner sensor TS2 2 Is bit 10 in service m...

Страница 660: ... J102 B8 and J102 B7 on the DC controller PCB Is the volt age between terminals about 2 V during copying and 0 V during standby NO Replace the DC controller PCB Drum heater H3 4 Remove the drum and set the meter range to Ω Ω Ω Ω Ωx1 Does the index of the meter swing when the probes of the meter are connected to both ends of the heater NO Replace the drum heater YES Replace the heater control PCB 4...

Страница 661: ...nel to the main controller PCB if normal replace the main controller PCB 4 2 18 The Set Control Card message fails to turn off Control card 1 Is the control card inserted correctly NO Insert the control card correctly CC IV Main controller PCB 2 Can a print be made by pressing the Start key YES Replace the CC IV NO Replace the main controller PCB 4 2 19 The Add Paper message fails to turn on front...

Страница 662: ...he main relay Is the problem corrected YES End Fixing heater H1 H2 4 Connect the probes of the meter to both terminals of the fixing heater Is there electrical continuity NO Replace the fixing heater AC driver PCB DC controller PCB 5 Is the voltage between the following connectors on the DC control ler PCB about 5 V Heater Main heater H1 J102 B11 J102 B7 Sub heater H2 J102 B9 J102 B7 YES Replace t...

Страница 663: ... Deck pickup clutch J05 11 J05 12 YES Check the wiring if normal replace the clutch NO Replace the deck driver PCB 4 2 23 The deck lifter fails to move up side paper deck Deck 1 Is the deck mounted correctly NO Mount the deck correctly Lifter cable 2 Is the lifter cable routed correctly NO Route the lifter cable correctly Spring Lever 3 Push up the deck pickup roller releasing lever with your fing...

Страница 664: ...k lifter lower limit detecting switch SW102 Deck driver PCB 6 Is the voltage between J08 8 and J08 7 GND on the deck driver PCB as follows when the deck is opened closed opened 0 V closed 5 V YES Check the lever and the wiring if normal replace the switch NO Replace the deck driver PCB Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 665: ...ouped into the following by location 1 Pickup assembly 2 Separation feeding assembly 3 Fixing delivery assembly 4 Drum cleaning assembly 5 Duplex reversing assembly 6 Feeding assembly The troubleshooting procedures that follow are organized according to location to find out the location and the nature of a jam use service mode COPIER DISPLAY JAM F04 501 01 2 3 4 5 6 1 Download Free Service Manual ...

Страница 666: ...oller Guide plate NO Check the guide plate for deformation 5 1 2 Separation Feeding assembly Print paper 1 Is the leading edge of print paper past the registration roller YES Go to step 5 NO Check the distance between the upper and lower guides in front of the registration roller then make adjustments as needed Registration roller 2 Is the coupling of the registration roller engaged correctly NO M...

Страница 667: ...claws 11 Is the spring of the separation claw displaced YES Mount the spring correctly Feeding belt 12 Are the three feeding belts rotating correctly YES Check to see if the feeding fan is operating Feeding fan YES Check to make sure that the feeding fan is operating 5 1 3 Fixing Delivery assembly Separation claws delivery assembly 1 Are the separation claws worn deformed YES 1 Replace the separat...

Страница 668: ...t re turn to its initial position by the work of the spring NO Correct how the delivery paper deflecting plate is mounted 12 Us the paper path of the delivery paper deflecting plate deformed or scratched YES Replace the delivery paper deflecting plate Delivery roller drive assembly 13 Does the delivery roller move smoothly NO Check the delivery roller drive assembly Leading edge margin 14 Is the l...

Страница 669: ...e Separation claws cleaning assembly 3 Are the separation claws under the cleaning assembly damaged YES Replace the separation claws 4 Is the spring of the separation claws displaced YES Mount the spring correctly Print paper High voltage transformer DC controller PCB 5 Try paper of a type recommended by Canon Is the problem cor rected YES Advise the user to use recommended paper NO 1 Check the hi...

Страница 670: ...4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 4 57 T Motor 4 Do the reversal motor M14 duplex feeding left motor M29 du plex feeding right motor M18 and vertical path duplex motor M25 rotate at the correct timing NO Replace the motor Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 671: ...peration for the feeding fan Check the separation charging assembly Print paper 2 Try paper fresh out of package Is the problem corrected YES The paper may be moist Advise the user on the correct method of storing paper 3 Try paper recommended by Canon Is the problem corrected YES Advise the user to use recommended paper Paper guide Fixing assembly inlet drive solenoid SL1 4 Is the paper guide coa...

Страница 672: ...rical Parts 6 1 Clutches F04 601 01 6 1 1 Reader Unit The reader unit does not have a clutch 6 1 2 Printer Unit Symbol Name Notation Function Clutch CL1 Drives the developing cylinder CL2 Drives the registration roller CL3 Drives the manual feed pickup roller CL4 Drives the left deck pull off roller CL1 CL4 CL3 CL2 CL Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 673: ...iR5000 iR6000 REV 0 JULY 2000 CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 4 60 T 6 2 Solenoids and Switches F04 602 01 SW3 SW4 SW1 MSW1 MSW2 MSW3 SL9 SL5 SL2 SL3 SL4 SL7 SL6 SL8 SL1 SW2 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 674: ... mechanism SL4 Drives the cassette 4 pickup mechanism SL5 Drives the delivery flapper SL6 Drives the right deck pickup mechanism SL7 Drives the left deck pickup mechanism SL8 Drives the reversing flapper SL9 Drives the fixing web Switch SW1 Main power switch SW2 Front cover switch SW3 Environment switch SW4 Cassette heater switch MSW1 Detects the state locked of the waste toner screw MSW2 Detects ...

Страница 675: ... iR6000 REV 0 JULY 2000 CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 4 62 T M4 M13 M6 M3 M15 M8 M7 M20 M21 M14 M29 M18 M16 M19 M12 M9 M1 M17 M25 M26 M24 M11 M27 M2 M10 M5 6 3 Motors F04 603 01 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 676: ...cleaning motor M8 Transfer separation charging wire cleaning motor M9 Hopper stirring motor M10 Hopper supply motor M11 Right deck pickup motor M12 Cassette 3 4 pickup motor M13 Delivery motor M14 Reversal motor M15 Laser scanner motor M16 Duplex horizontal registration motor M17 Pre registration motor M18 Duplex feeding right motor M19 Fixing motor M20 Cassette 3 lifter motor M21 Cassette 4 lifte...

Страница 677: ... 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000 iR6000 REV 0 JULY 2000 CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 4 64 T FM3 FM1 FM4 FM2 FM5 FM8 FM7 FM6 6 4 Fans F04 604 01 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 678: ... 4 1 Reader Unit The reader unit does not have a fan 6 4 2 Printer unit Symbol Name Notation Function Fan FM1 Feeding fan FM2 Primary charging cooling fan FM3 Heat discharging fan FM4 Controller cooling fan FM5 De curling fan FM6 DC power supply fan FM7 HDD fan FM8 Duplex feeding fan Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 679: ...OTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 4 66 T SVR2 SVR4 SVR5 SV1 SV2 PS50 PS49 PS48 PS47 SVR3 PS25 PS23 PS26 PS13 PS21 PS17 PS15 PS27 PS14 PS16 PS18 PS22 PS12 PS20 PS10 PS9 PS8 PS40 PS39 PS43 PS19 PS6 PS5 PS7 PS32 PS28 PS24 PS11 6 5 Sensors F04 605 01 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 680: ...2000 CANON iR5000 iR6000 REV 0 JULY 2000 CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 4 67 T PS4 PS36 PS46 PS35 PS45 PS29 PS37 PS38 PS34 PS31 PS30 PS33 PS2 SVR1 PS3 F04 605 02 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 681: ...limit sensor PS9 Left deck open closed sensor PS10 Left deck lifter sensor PS11 Left deck paper sensor PS12 Left deck limit sensor PS13 Cassette 3 paper sensor PS14 Cassette 4 paper sensor PS15 Cassette 3 open closed sensor PS16 Cassette 4 open closed sensor PS17 Cassette 3 lifter sensor PS18 Cassette 4 lifter sensor PS19 Right deck re try sensor PS20 Left deck re try sensor PS21 Cassette 3 re try...

Страница 682: ... sensor PS46 Delivery jam sensor PS47 Right deck level sensor upper PS48 Right deck level sensor lower PS49 Left deck level sensor upper PS50 Left deck level sensor lower Photointerrupter SV1 Detects the length of paper in the cassette 4 100 V model only SV2 Detects the length of paper in the cassette 3 Slide resistor SVR1 Detects the width of paper on the manual feed tray SVR2 Detects the level o...

Страница 683: ...NON iR5000 iR6000 REV 0 JULY 2000 CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 4 70 T TS2 HU1 TS1 LA1 H3 H5 H4 ELCB H2 H1 TP1 H6 THM1 THM2 LA2 6 6 Lamps Heaters and Others F04 606 01 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 684: ...ion Lamp LA1 Pre exposure lamp LED Heater H1 Fixing main heater H2 Fixing sub heater H3 Drum heater H4 Cassette heater standard in 100 V model Thermistor TH1 Fixing heater main thermistor TH2 Fixing heater sub thermistor ends Thermal switch TP1 Fixing heater thermal switch Leakage breaker ELCB Leakage breaker Toner sensor TS1 Developing assembly toner sensor TS2 Hopper toner sensor Environment sen...

Страница 685: ...0 2000 CANON iR5000 iR6000 REV 0 JULY 2000 CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 4 72 T 11 17 12 9 23 20 6 7 4 8 5 1 24 21 22 2 10 3 14 18 15 13 25 6 7 PCBs F04 607 01 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 686: ...s the surface potential of the photosensitive drum 7 Drum heater control PCB Controls the drum heater 8 Accessories power supply PCB Supplies power to the finisher 9 Duplex driver PCB Controls the sensor motor and solenoid of the du plex unit 10 Control panel PCB Controls the keys and LEDs 11 Laser driver PCB Controls the laser drive 14 BD PCB Detects the laser beam 17 Control panel CPU PCB Contro...

Страница 687: ... the factory requir ing special tools and high accuracy Do not touch them in the field 6 8 1 Main Controller PCB F06 608 01 The DIP switch SW1002 is for the factory Do not use it in the field It is used when making settings before shipment of the machine J1012 J1018 J1044 J1017 B1 B1 A1 6 40 1 1 B15 B18 A18 A15 A1 A22 B1 B22 A1 J1024 J1022 J1060 J1061 J1014 J1002 J1011 J1023 1 1 10 4 B40 B1 A40 A1...

Страница 688: ...10 J113 J111 J125 J109 J107 J112 J104 J105 J115 J102 J101 J119 J106 J118 J103 J124 J108 J114 J302 J120 J116 J117 J121 J123 J126 J303 J203 VR103 J100 J201 B1 B17 B1 B15 B1 B14 A1 A9 1 3 A1 A17 A1 A1 A1 A9 A1 A20 A1 A15 13 1 A1 A16 A1 1 8 4 1 1 6 A20 B1 2 1 1 12 1 5 A1 A20 1 8 A1 5 1 10 1 1 1 4 1 4 1 20 4 4 1 A1 A12 B12 B1 B1 B20 B20 A18 B1 B1 B1 B15 B1 B16 B9 B1 B20 A18 1 4 A15 B1 B13 A1 A13 A14 J3...

Страница 689: ... 3 1 4 6 3 2 J5004 A1 B1 A40 B40 1 2 6 8 3 Reader Controller PCB F04 608 04 SW5001 1 SW5001 2 ON Inch series Not used OFF AB series Not used 6 8 4 Power Supply PCB F04 608 05 J4011 J4015 J4008 J4016 J4004 PN4006 PN4001 PN4004 PN4003 PN4002 J4001 J4007 J4006 J4005 PN4005 J4017 J4003 J4014 J4009 J4010 J4002 J4013 2 5 1 1 1 10 11 8 1 1 1 4 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 15 2 3 5 4 1 4 2 13 15 1 1 2 1 1 10 1 10 1 10 2...

Страница 690: ...6 6 8 6 Drum Heater Control PCB F04 608 07 SW2001 1 SW2001 2 ON controlled to 47 C Not used OFF controlled to 43 C default Not used For details of drum heater control see 6 Controlling the Drum Heater in Chapter 4 J4502 J4501 VR4501 J4503 J4505 J4508 J4507 J4506 J4504 1 13 1 2 1 5 1 3 SW2001 ON 1 2 J2001 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 691: ...Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 692: ...COPYRIGHT 2000 CANON INC 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000 iR6000 REV 0 JULY 2000 CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 693: ...Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 694: ... 2 screen and Level 3 screen F05 101 01 Initial screen Level 1 Level 2 screen Level 3 screen Level 3 screen User screen From Level 1 Level 2 screen Reset key Preceding Following page Preceding Following page Preceding Following page 2 8 Reset key Select a Level 1 item at the top of the screen Select a Level 2 item from the list Level 3 screen Level 3 screen Select an item Download Free Service Man...

Страница 695: ... the user mode key In response the Initial screen will appear COPIER FEEDER SORTER BOARD DISPLAY I O ADJUST FUNCTION OPTION TEST COUNTER Control display mode I O display mode Adjustment mode Operation inspection mode Settings mode Test print mode Counter mode F05 102 01 COPIER FEEDER SORTER BOARD Service mode of the accessory boards Service mode of the ADF Only if installed Only if installed Only ...

Страница 696: ...ted on the service label attached to the service book case found behind the front cover If you have replaced the reader controller PCB or the DC controller PCB be sure to re move the EEPROM from the old PCB and mount it to the new PCB If you have initialized the RAM the ADJUST and OPTION settings are replaced with the default settings If you have made adjustments and changed service mode settings ...

Страница 697: ...Initial Screen F05 105 01 1 5 2 Level 1 Level 2 Screen F05 105 02 COPIER FEEDER SORTER BOARD Initial item Touch to select an item VERSION USER ANALOG CST STS ACC STS JAM ERR HV STS ALARM 1 DPOT SENSOR Level 1 item Touch to select an item Level 2 items Touch to select an item MISC Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 698: ... or the like under way DOOR door open COPYING copying under way ERROR error exists NO TONER toner absent WTNR FUL full of waste toner Level 2 item Level 3 item To go back to previous page To go to next page Page number xxxxx yyyyy aaaaa bbbbb OK ADJ X ADJ XY 1 1 READY ADJ X key stops the ongoing operation Accepts input value Switches between and Highlighted when selected Before Stop key clears a v...

Страница 699: ...E MODE 5 6 T 2 DISPLAY control display mode 2 1 COPIER The following screen appears in response to COPIER DISPLAY for the items see the pages that follow F05 201 01 VERSION USER ANALOG CST STS ACC STS JAM ERR HV STS DPOT SENSOR ALARM 1 MISC Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 700: ...the feeder controller PCB SORTER Indicates the ROM version of the finisher controller PCB NIB Indicates the version of the network software PS PCL Indicates the version of the printer board PS PCL LIPS Indicates the version of the printer board LIPS SDL STCH Indicates the ROM version of the saddle stitcher controller PCB MN CONT Indicates the version of the software of the main controller PCB RIP1...

Страница 701: ...01 USA Europe MODEL Indicates the identification of the model 0 iR5000 1 iR6000 ACC STS Indicates the connection of accessories FEEDER Indicates the connection of the ADF 0 not connected 1 connected SORTER Indicates the state connection of the finisher and the puncher unit Display xy x 0 finisher 1 saddle finisher 3 shift tray y 0 none 1 2 hole 2 2 3 hole 3 4 hole FRN 4 4 hole SWDN DECK Indicates ...

Страница 702: ...the connection of the LIPS board 0 not connected 1 con nected PS PCL Indicates the connection of a PS PCL board 0 none 1 PS PCL 2 PS Kanji RIP1 Indicates the connection of the RIP1 board 0 not connected 1 con nected ANALOG Indicates the measurement taken by the analog sensor TEMP Indicates the machine s internal temperature by environment sensor Unit C HUM Indicates the machine s internal humidity...

Страница 703: ...er size of the cassette and the manual feeder WIDTH C3 Indicates the paper width of the cassette 3 in terms of paper size WIDTH C4 Indicates the paper width of the cassette 4 in terms of paper size 100 V model only WIDTH MF Indicates the paper width of the manual feeder in terms of paper size Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 704: ... occurrence 0 copying machine 1 feeder 2 finisher FFff Jam code FF jam type T05 201 01 ff jam sensor T05 201 02 For the feeder T05 201 04 G Indicates the source of paper T05 201 03 HHHHHH IIIII Indicates the paper size JAM 1 7 READY AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFff G HHHHHH IIIII AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFff G HHHHHH IIIII AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFff G HHHHHH IIIII AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFff G HHHHHH IIIII AAA...

Страница 705: ... duplexing pre registration sensor PS30 xx1E deck pickup sensor PS101 xx1F deck feed sensor PS106 xx32 buffer path sensor PI14 xx33 inlet sensor PI1 xx34 delivery sensor PI3 xx35 staple tray sensor PI4 xx36 vertical path paper sensor PI17S xx37 delivery sensor PI11S T05 201 02 G Source of Paper Code Description 1 right front deck 2 left front deck 3 cassette 3 4 cassette 4 5 not used 6 not used 7 ...

Страница 706: ... the return time 24 hour notation EEEE Indicates the error code in question See Self Diagnosis in Chapter 6 FFff Indicates the detailed code in question if none 0000 G Indicates the location of occurrence 0 copying machine main controller 1 feeder 2 finisher 3 C F F 4 reader 5 printer 6 PDL 7 fax ERR 1 7 READY AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFff G AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFff G AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FF...

Страница 707: ...icates the level of current for pre transfer post charging TR Indicates the level of transfer charging current SP Indicates the level of separation charging current BIAS Indicates the level of developing bias DC SP N2 Indicates the level of separation charging current for the 2nd side of a double sided print TR N2 Indicates the level of transfer charging current for the 2nd side of a double sided ...

Страница 708: ...a potential VD for copying VDM Indicates the measurement of the dark area potential VD for copying op timum value VDT 6 V reference only VL2M P Indicates the measurement of the light area potential VL2 for printer PDL images optimum value 70 15 V reference only VL1M P Indicates the measurement of the light area potential VL1 for printer PDL images optimum value VL1T P 6 V VL1T P Indicates the meas...

Страница 709: ...al control for the laser intensity during output of printer PDL images range of indication 0 to 255 0 error LPOWER C Indicates the result of potential control for the laser intensity during output of copy images range of indication 0 to 255 0 error PRIM P Indicates the result of potential control for the primary charging current for printer PDL images range of indication 0 to 1400 µA optimum value...

Страница 710: ... 2000 2000 CANON iR5000 iR6000 REV 0 JULY 2000 CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE 5 17 T ALARM 1 Indicates alarm data ALRM 1 1 1 READY BODY 00 DF 00 SORTER ww xx yy zz PREV NEXT F05 201 04 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 711: ...age 11 transfer charging assembly leakage 12 separation charging assembly leakage 20 de curling fan FM5 locked 21 duplex unit feed fan FM8 locked 30 duplex unit horizontal registration HP detection fault 31 shift tray alarm DF Indicates alarms associated with the ADF For details see the Ser vice Manual of the ADF SORTER Indicates the alarms associated with For details see the Ser the finisher vice...

Страница 712: ...0 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000 iR6000 REV 0 JULY 2000 CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE 5 19 T 2 2 FEEDER FEEDSIZE Indicates the size of an original detected by the ADF FEEDER DISPLAY Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 713: ...s see the pages that follow F05 300 01 Guide to the Screen P001 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx bit 0 bit 15 address DC CON R CON FEEDER SORTER MN CON Input output port of DC controller PCB Input output port of reader controller PCB Input output port of main controller PCB Input output port of ADF controller PCB Input output port of finisher controller PCB Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot c...

Страница 714: ...re try sensor signal cassette 4 re try sensor signal left deck re try sensor signal reversal sensor 1 signal right pre registering limit sensor signal duplexing pre registration senor signal duplexing horizontal pre registration sensor signal reversal sensor 2 signal laser write start sensor signal developing assembly toner sensor signal hopper toner sensor signal duplexing paper senor signal fixi...

Страница 715: ...closed sensor signal cassette 4 open closed sensor signal cassette 3 size detection signal 0 cassette 3 size detection signal 1 not used fixing sub thermistor error detection signal 1 fixing main thermistor error detection signal E001 error hard detection signal fixing sub thermistor error detection signal 2 main relay OFF detection signal main SSR error signal sub SSR error signal DC controller s...

Страница 716: ...ock detection laser scanner motor lock detection signal delivery jam sensor signal for factory adjustment for factory adjustment for factory adjustment for factory adjustment not used LZC ERROR LZD ERROR LZ HEAT RDY LZ HEAT ERROR shift tray paper sensor signal shift tray HP detection front shift tray HP detection rear shift tray connection detection signal flicker control signal power supply spec ...

Страница 717: ...te signal EEPROM select signal 1 EEPROM select signal 2 EEPROM select signal 3 shift tray detection signal shift tray motor CW signal shift tray motor CCW signal right deck pickup solenoid drive signal left deck pickup solenoid drive signal cassette 3 pickup solenoid drive signal cassette 4 pickup solenoid drive signal manual feed releasing solenoid drive signal not used delivery flapper solenoid ...

Страница 718: ...signal hopper supply motor drive signal laser scanner motor speed switch signal cassette 4 lifter motor drive signal cassette 3 lifter motor drive signal not used not used fixing main heater ON signal fixing sub heater ON signal drum heater ON signal not used separation feed fan half speed signal separation feed fan full speed signal primary charging cooling fan half speed signal primary charging ...

Страница 719: ...d not used pre exposure LED ON signal potential sensor ON signal fixing 12 V supply signal DDI PPRDY DDI CTS not used not used not used not used not used not used DDI CPRDY DDI PRSST DDI RST not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used duplexing feed fan not used reversal motor clock signal not used not used not used duplexing feed lef...

Страница 720: ...t used pre registration motor clock signal not used duplexing feed right motor clock signal serial 0 TXD serial 1 TXD serial 0 RXD serial 1 RXD not used not used not used not used cassette paper width input port switch signal not used DC power supply fan drive signal duplexing horizontal registration motor clock signal not used not used not used not used not used not used laser enable signal not u...

Страница 721: ...ly position sensor signal deck paper level sensor signal deck lifter lower limit detection signal deck set sensor signal deck open sensor signal deck ID1 deck ID2 not used not used deck open LED ON signal deck pickup roller releasing solenoid drive signal not used deck pickup clutch drive signal not used not used deck main motor drive signal deck lifter motor drive signal deck lifter lower limit d...

Страница 722: ...PRDY scanning lamp inverter error signal DDI S transmission RS232Ctransmission factoryterminaltransmission DDI S reception RS232C reception factory terminal reception ITOP transmission image leading edge signal DDI SRTS DDI SPO 0 DDI SPO 1 DDI SPO 2 not used not used not used original sensor 3 signal AB input original sensor 4 signal Inch input DDI SPRTST serial data to CCD clock to CCD output to ...

Страница 723: ... used not used scanner motor drive control 2 scanner motor drive control 3 scanner motor drive control 4 scanner motor drive control RETURN scanner motor drive control 0 1 scanner motor drive control 0 1 scanner motor drive current control scanner motor drive current control scanner motor drive current control scanner motor drive current control scanner motor drive current control not used Remarks...

Страница 724: ...l night power OFF signal DDI S general output DDI S general output PPRTST signal DDI P general output DDI P general output DDI P general output not used serial EEPROM D0 operation enable coin robot operation enable CC IV serial ROM connection detection flash ROM R B parallel EEPROM R B battery alarm FAX SSB forced reset parallel EEPROM write protect color UI I F enable LCD back light control coin ...

Страница 725: ...O 2 flash ROM write protect battery charge control board version board version board version BWUI detect Color UI detect FAX SSB identification FAX SSB identification FAX SSB identification Remarks 1 counter 1 counter accessporttoEEPROM accessporttoEEPROM accessporttoEEPROM 0 LIPSboardforcedreset not used not used not used for factory for factory for factory 0 B W UI present 0 color UI present not...

Страница 726: ...fication sensor signal pickup motor drive clock signal pickup motor mode signal pickup motor CW CCW signal pickup motor enable output not used feed motor enable output pickup clutch drive signal locking solenoid signal serial communication image leading edge signal serial communication EEPROM data output EEPROM clock EEPROM chip select not used not used original width VR signal post separation sen...

Страница 727: ...itch ADF open closed sensor signal delivery reversing motor excitation phase A output delivery reversing motor excitation phase A output delivery reversing motor excitation phase key B output delivery reversing motor excitation phase B output feed motor mode output feed motor mode output feed motor CW CCW switch signal DIP switch DIPSW8 signal DIP switch DIPSW7 signal DIP switch DIPSW6 signal DIP ...

Страница 728: ...not used not used LED ON signal LED ON signal LED ON signal LED ON signal not used not used not used not used tray volume post separation sensor analog input read sensor analog input delivery paper reversal sensor analog input not used not used not used not used pickup motor feed motor delivery reversal motor post separation sensor_DA post separation sensor_TH read sensor DA read sensor TH deliver...

Страница 729: ...se B output alignment motor phase A output not used tray lift motor PWM delivery motor PWM swing motor PWM punch motor PWM horizontal registration motor phase B output horizontal registration motor phaseA output tray lift motor DOWN drive output tray lift motor UP drive output not used not used LED2 ON solenoid output not used height sensor input LED1 ON signal output height sensor external clock ...

Страница 730: ... feed motor clock input inlet feed motor clock input No 1 feed motor clock input delivery motor clock detection signal not used not used not used not used not used not used tray lift motor clock signal 1 tray lift motor clock signal 2 swing motor clock detection signal not used stacker EEPROM CLK signal stacker EEPROM data out signal stitcher EEPROM CS signal LWR input output HWR output output RD ...

Страница 731: ...nection detection signal punch home position detection signal horizontalregistrationhomepositiondetectionsignal front cover open detecting switch signal upper cover open detecting switch signal not used not used not used not used PUSH SW3 PUSH SW2 punch unit EEPROM data in stapler shift home position detection signal alignment home position detection signal tray open position detection signal shut...

Страница 732: ...or CCW drive output punch motor CCW drive output punch motor CW drive output delivery motor CCW drive output delivery motor CW drive output stapler motor CCW drive output stapler motor CW drive output not used stepping motor OFF punch horizontal registration motor current switch inlet feed motor current switch 2 inlet feed motor current swing 1 No 2 feed motor current switch 2 No 2 feed motor curr...

Страница 733: ... buffer inlet solenoid drive signal flapper solenoid drive signal paddle solenoid drive signal solenoid timer output escape solenoid drive signal not used not used dust full detection signal 24 V output OFF detection signal horizontal registration detection signal 1 horizontal registration detection signal 2 horizontal registration detection signal 3 horizontal registration detection signal 4 trai...

Страница 734: ... 1 deflecting plate solenoid drive signal No 2 deflecting plate solenoid drive signal not used not used not used not used not used not used feed roller plate solenoid drive signal solenoid timer output paper positioning plate motor current switch not used 24 V output OFF detection signal paper push on plate leading edge position signal delivery detection signal not used not used not used not used ...

Страница 735: ...plate motor CCW drive output not used alignment motor phase A output alignment motor phase B output paper fold motor PWM paper push on motor CW drive output guide motor phase A output guide motor phase B output guide motor current switch alignment motor current switch not used No 2 paper sensor paper detection signal No 3 paper sensor paper detection signal stitching HP detection signal 2 stitchin...

Страница 736: ...nlet cover open detection signal delivery cover open detecting switch signal not used TIP SW1 bit 8 TIP SW1 bit 7 TIP SW1 bit 6 TIP SW1 bit 5 TIP SW1 bit 4 TIP SW1 bit 3 TIP SW1 bit 2 TIP SW1 bit 1 not used stitcher rear punching detection stitcher front punching detection not used inlet cover sensor connection detection not used guide HP sensor connection detection stitcher compartment sensor con...

Страница 737: ...ODE 5 44 T 4 ADJUST adjustment mode 4 1 COPIER The following screen appears in response to COPIER ADJUST for the items see the pages that follow F05 401 01 HV PRI V CONT ADJ XY CCD AE LASER MISC BLANK HV SP DENS DEVELOP HV TR FEED ADJ CST ADJ Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 738: ...ecreases text density Copy density A higher setting increases text density AE Executing AE Adjustment If you have cleared the RAM on the reader controller PCB enter the settings indicated on the service label AE TBL Use it to adjust the density of characters for image density adjustment Range of 1 to 9 Default 5 adjustment Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 739: ...tion Range of 250 to 290 A change of 1 causes a shift of 0 1 mm adjustment Caution Be sure to execute this mode before adjusting the margin Do not use this mode to create a margin ADJ Y Use it to adjust the CCD read start position Range of 100 to 400 A change of 1 causes a shift of 0 1 mm adjustment F05 401 03 F05 401 04 Vertical size plate Standard white plate Higher setting Lower setting Copyboa...

Страница 740: ... value be sure to open and then close the ADF for HP search ADJ Y DF Use it to adjust the ADF read start position ADF horizontal registration in scanning direction Range of 100 to 400 unit 0 1 mm adjustment STRD POS Use it to adjust the CCD read position for stream reading Range of 30 to 60 A change of 1 causes a shift of 0 1 mm adjustment COPIER ADJUST F05 401 05 F05 401 06 Vertical size plate St...

Страница 741: ...dard white plate for shading correction EGGN ST Use it to enter an adjustment value for the edge gain correction start posi tion for the CCD EGGN END Use it to enter an adjustment value for the edge gain correction end position for the CCD LASER Adjusting the Laser Output If you have cleared the RAM on the DC controller PCB be sure to enter the settings indi cated on the service label PVE OFST Use...

Страница 742: ...ntial control mechanism is dis abled HVT DE Use it to enter the offset value for the development high voltage output for the high voltage unit Caution If you have replaced the high voltage unit or cleared the RAM on the DC controller PCB enter the settings indicated on the new high voltage unit D HV DE Use it to enter the offset value for the development high voltage output of the DC controller PC...

Страница 743: ...rrect the F value table Range of 1 to 9 default 5 adjustment BLANK Adjusting the Non Image Width If you have cleared the RAM on the DC controller PCB enter the value indicated on the service label BLANK T Use it to enter the image leading edge non image width adjustment value Range of 1 to 500 adjustment BLANK B Use it to enter the image trailing edge non image width adjustment value F05 401 07 Wh...

Страница 744: ...vice label EPOTOFST Use it to enter the offset value for the potential sensor Range of 0 to 255 default 0 adjustment VD OFST Use it to enter the offset value for the VD target potential for the copier Range of 5 to 5 unit 10 V default 0 adjustment DE OFS P Use it to enter the offset value for the VL target potential for the printer PDL Vdc fine adjustment Range of 50 to 50 unit V default 0 adjustm...

Страница 745: ...on If you have cleared the RAM on the DC controller PCB enter the settings indicated on the service label TR N2 Use it to enter the output adjustment value for the transfer charging current printing on the 2nd side of a double sided plain paper sheet Caution If you have cleared the RAM on the DC controller PCB enter the settings indicated on the service label PRE TR Use it to enter the output adju...

Страница 746: ... on the DC controller PCB enter the settings indicated on the label attached to the new DC controller PCB HV SP Adjusting the Output of the Separation Charging Assembly SP N1 Use it to enter the output adjustment value of the separation charging cur rent printing on the face of a sheet of plain paper and printing on the 1st side of a double sided sheet Caution If you have cleared the RAM on the DC...

Страница 747: ...nit 0 1 mm adjustment Caution If you have cleared the RAM on the DC controller PCB enter the settings indicated on the service label ADJ REFE Use it to adjust the horizontal registration for re pickup If the image is displaced on the front increase the setting Range of 101 to 100 unit 0 1 mm adjustment Caution If you have cleared the RAM on the DC controller PCB enter the settings indicated on the...

Страница 748: ...cting VR execute FUNCTION CST in service mode C4 A4R Use it to enter the paper width basic value A4R 100 V model only for the cassette 4 Caution If you have replaced the paper width detecting VR execute FUNCTION CST in service mode MF A4R Use it to enter the paper width basic value A4R for the manual feed tray Caution If you have replaced the paper width detecting VR execute FUNCTION CST in servic...

Страница 749: ... If you have cleared the RAM on the DC controller PCB enter the settings indicated on the service label ATM Use it to select an operating environment in relation to atmospheric pres sure A low atmospheric pressure tends to cause leakage lower the target poten tial control Range of 0 to 2 0 1 to 0 75 atm up to altitude of 2500m adjustment 1 0 75 to 0 70 atm up to altitude of 2500 to 3000m 2 0 70 to...

Страница 750: ... the Mode 1 Make a print of the test chart and check the position of the image 2 Select the mode item and change the setting to make adjustments 3 Press the OK key 4 Make a print of the test chart once again and check to see the position of the image is as indicated LA SPEED Use it to adjust the original feed speed for ADF stream reading speed A higher setting increases the speed The data will be ...

Страница 751: ...s toward the leading edge middle of the sheet Range of 4 to 2 unit mm adjustment Using the Mode 1 Make a print of the Test Chart and check the position of the holes 2 Select this item and change the setting as needed 3 Press the OK key 4 Make a print of the Test Chart once again and see that the position for the holes is as indicated SORTER ADJUST Feeding direction Higher setting Lower setting Pap...

Страница 752: ...UNCTION operation inspection mode 5 1 COPIER The following screen appears in response to COPIER FUNCTION for the items see the pages that follow F05 501 01 INSTALL CCD LASER DPC CST CLEANING FIXING SYSTEM PANEL CLEAR PART CHK MISC R MISC P HRD DISK SENS ADJ Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 753: ...toner supply about 8 to 10 min While toner is being supplied the duration sec is counted down start ing at 600 sec 3 The machine stops automatically at the end of the operation STRD POS Use it to execute auto adjustment of the position of the CCD read position for stream reading mode Caution Execute this mode at time of installing an ADF or if you have removed and then installed the existing ADF U...

Страница 754: ...pyboard glass standard white plate Use the whitest of all papers used by the user as the standard white paper Using the Mode 1 Place sheets of standard white paper 10 sheets min on the copyboard glass 2 Select the mode item and press the OK key The machine executes auto adjustment about 1 min The machine stops operation at the end of auto adjustment 3 Record the updated settings on the service lab...

Страница 755: ...utomatically at the end of the operation EGGN POS Use it to execute auto adjustment for the edge gain correction position for the CCD The CCD edge gain correction mechanism is effective only when an ADF is in use Caution If the CCD unit has been replaced be sure to execute the following in advance COPIER FUNCTION CCD CCD ADJ If the CCD unit No 1 mirror mount or No 2 mirror mount has been replaced ...

Страница 756: ...0 CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE 5 63 T Edge gain correction plate Copyboard glass front Reading glass F05 501 03 5 When the following has been updated enter the new settings COPIER ADJUST CCD EGGN ST and EGGN END COPIER FUNCTION Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 757: ...igher If you have replaced the photosensitive drum or the laser unit or changed the drum potential setting execute potential control using this mode item Using the Mode 1 Select the mode item and enter 1 then press the OK key 2 Turn off and then on the power switch The machine will execute potential control OFST Use it to execute offset adjustment for the potential sensor Caution Do not execute th...

Страница 758: ...e STMTR width 2 Select C3 STMTR C4 STMTR and press the OK key The machine executes adjustment automatically at the end of which the value is stored 3 Likewise repeat steps 1 and 2 for A4R MF A4R MF A6R MF A4 Use it to store the paper width basic value for the manual feed tray Caution For fine adjustment after storing the basic value make the following selec tions ADJUST CST ADJ MF A4R MF A6R MF A4...

Страница 759: ...chine stops automatically at the end of the cleaning operation FIXING Executing Auto Adjustment for Fixing Assembly Related Items NIP CHK Use it to obtain an output for measuring the fixing nip width Using the Mode 1 Make about 20 A4 copies of the test sheet 2 Place an A4 sheet of paper on the manual feed tray 3 Select the mode item to highlight and press the OK key The sheet will be picked up and...

Страница 760: ...nd the operation LED OFF Use it to end a LED check of the control panel Using the Mode 1 Select the mode item to end the check KEY CHK Use it to check key inputs Using the Mode 1 Select the mode item 2 Press any key so that its corresponding character will appear on the touch panel indicating that the input is normal T05 501 01 TOUCHKEY Use it to adjust the coordinates of the touch panel Caution U...

Страница 761: ... ID interrupt INTERRUPT additional functions USER guide T05 501 01 PART CHK Checking the operation of various loads CL Use it to select the clutch to check Using the Mode 1 Select the mode item 2 Using the keypad enter the code of the clutch in question T05 501 02 3 Press the OK key CL ON Use it to check the operation of a clutch Using the Mode 1 Select the mode item and press the OK key ON 10 sec...

Страница 762: ...for 10 sec and then turns off The shift tray motor stops at the front rear home position SL Use it to select the solenoid to check for operation Using the Mode 1 Select the mode item 2 Using the keypad enter the code of the solenoid T05 501 04 3 Press the OK key SL ON Use it to check the operation of the solenoid Using the Mode 1 Select the mode item and press the OK key ON OFF for 10 secs ON OFF ...

Страница 763: ... 20 duplexing feed left motor M29 9 left deck lifter motor M4 21 delivery motor M13 10 cassette 3 lifter motor M20 22 pre registration motor M17 11 cassette 4 lifter motor M21 23 duplexing feed right motor M18 12 right deck pickup motor M11 24 shift tray motor SM 101 T05 501 03 Code Solenoid Name Code Name Code Name 1 right deck pickup solenoid SL6 7 delivery flapper solenoid SL5 2 left deck picku...

Страница 764: ... Turn off and then on the main power switch R CON Use it to clear the RAM on the reader controller PCB Using the Mode 1 Select the mode item and press the OK key 2 Turn off and then on the main power switch SERVICE Use it to clear the backup data of service mode COPIER OPTION Using the Mode 1 Select the mode item and press the OK key 2 Turn off and then on the main power switch JAM HIST Use it to ...

Страница 765: ...de item and press the OK key 2 Turn off and then on the main power switch MMI Use it to clear the backup data on user mode settings spec ID group ID mode memory etc Using the Mode 1 Select the mode item and press the OK key 2 Turn off and then on the main power switch MSIC R Checking Reader Unit Related Operations SCANLAMP Use it to check the activation of the scanning lamp Using the Mode 1 Select...

Страница 766: ...odes PRE EXP Use it to check the activation of the pre exposure LED Using the Mode 1 Select the mode item and press the OK key The pre exposure LED will remain on for about 3 secs and will turn off HRD DISK Use it to check the operation of the hard disk SCANDISK Use it to detect an error on the hard disk Caution Use it on a hard disk found to have a problem Using the Mode 1 Select the mode item an...

Страница 767: ...0 mm high at the point of detection of either sensor on the shift tray 3 Select the mode item and press the OK key 4 By referring to the indication move the sensor closer to the paper and fix it in position where the indication changes to ON 5 Move the paper to the position of detection of the other sensor 6 Repeat step 4 for the other sensor 7 Press the Stop key to end the adjustment SYSTEM Check...

Страница 768: ... SENS INT Use it to adjust the sensitivity of each sensor of the ADF Caution Be sure to clean the sensor before executing this mode Using the Mode 1 Select the mode item and press the OK key The machine stops operation at the end of the adjustment COPIER FUNCTION Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 769: ...V 0 JULY 2000 CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE 5 76 T 6 OPTION settings mode 6 1 COPIER The following screen appears in response to COPIER OPTION for the items see the pages that follow BODY USER CST ACC TEMPO F05 601 01 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 770: ...ce mode Settings 0 OFF 1 priority on fixing while controlling down sequence tempera ture to 10 C for all 2 priority on productivity while controlling down sequence temperature to 5 C for all IDL MODE Use it to select idle rotation mode for the developing assembly Settings 0 OFF no idle rotation default 1 auto control by environment sensor 2 idle rotation started when fixing temperature reaches 100...

Страница 771: ...umidity ON for 4 sec OFF for 2 sec 1 uses fixed pattern ON for 2 sec OFF for 1 sec SCANSLCT Use it to turn on off the ADF original size detection mechanism When ON the scan size is determined according to the detected original size Settings 0 OFF default 1 ON OHP TEMP Use it to switch the temperature setting for transparency mode The control mechanism will use a lower fixing temperature to improve...

Страница 772: ...nt start temperatures are reduced by 15 C In the case of the iR6000 Series 100 V model the period of initial mul tiple rotation is reduced by 1 min Caution For the 120 230 V model the same control mechanism is used for both iR6000 Series and iR5000 Series This mode is disabled if FSPD S1 is set Settings 0 standard default 1 reduced mode as above SHARP Use it to change the sharpness level of the im...

Страница 773: ...age code ja en etc to identify the site ex pressed as in service mode COPIER DISPLAY USER LANGUAGE Using the Mode 1 Select RMT LANG 2 Each press on the key brings up a different language code 3 When the desired language code has appeared press the OK key HI HUME Use it to switch the developing bias frequency if separation faults occur in a high humidity environment Caution If separation faults occ...

Страница 774: ...revent re transfer 2 to prevent separation fault 3 to prevent transfer fault TR SP DK Use it to switch the transfer separation output level when the paper deck is used as the source of paper to prevent various problems Settings 0 normal default 1 to prevent re transfer 2 to prevent separation fault 3 to prevent transfer fault TPR DECL Use it to switch the delivery path to improve stacking performa...

Страница 775: ...ttings 0 OFF no warning issued default 1 ON warning issued COUNTER1 Use it to indicate the type of soft counter of the control panel Caution The type of soft counter 1 cannot be changed Settings 101 total 1 default fixed to 101 see T05 601 01 COUNTER2 Use it to change the type of soft counter 2 of the control panel to suit the needs of the user or the dealer Settings 000 to 804 T05 601 01 default ...

Страница 776: ...of presence absence of card in remote accepts print job but stops printing in absence of card with card enables printing but imposes charge default 2 disables control in remote does not accept print job in remote B4 L CNT Use it to specify whether B4 sheets are counted as large size or small size for soft counters 1 through 6 Settings 0 small size default 1 large size TRAY STP Use it to prohibit s...

Страница 777: ...lect the number of lines for photo mode printing Settings 0 141 lines default 1 134 lines COPY JOB Use it to prevent auto copy start when a coin robot and a card reader Settings 0 copy job auto start selected default 1 copy job auto start not selected OP SZ DT Use it to turn on and off the original size detection mechanism in book mode Settings 0 OFF accepts input of original size from control pan...

Страница 778: ...ints 700 reception prints 400s copies prints 800 report prints Legend counter effective for the machine 4C full color mono mono color Y M C R G B sepia mono Bk black mono L large size larger than B4 S small size B4 or smaller number in counter count indicating large size sheets In service mode the settings may be changed so that B4 or larger may be counted as large size COPIER OPTION USER B4 L CNT...

Страница 779: ...4 print Bk 2 315 print 4C L 316 print 4C S 317 print Mono L 318 print Mono S Effective No Counter type 319 print Bk L 320 print Bk S 321 print 4C Mono L 322 print 4C Mono S 323 print 4C Mono 2 324 print 4C Mono 1 325 print 4C L double sided 326 print 4C S double sided 327 print Mono L double sided 328 print Mono S double sided 329 print Bk L double sided 330 print Bk S double sided 331 PDL print t...

Страница 780: ... total 2 511 color scan L copy scan 4C L 512 color scan S copy scan 4C S 513 copy scan L 514 copy scan S 515 copy scan total Effective No Counter type 601 box print total 1 602 box print total 2 603 box print L 604 box print S 701 reception print total 1 702 reception print total 2 703 reception print L 704 reception print S 801 report print total 1 802 report print total 2 803 report print L 804 ...

Страница 781: ... OFI 37 M OFI CST U3 Use it to specify paper names used for paper size group U3 Settings 34 G LGL default 29 A LTR 25 A FLS CST U4 Use it to specify paper names used for paper size group U4 Settings 18 LTR default 29 A LTR P SZ C1 P SZ C2 Use it to specify paper size used in the front deck C1 right deck C2 left deck Caution After electing the appropriate paper size be sure to turn off and then on ...

Страница 782: ...rnment 23 K LGLR Korean government R 24 FLSC FOOLSCAP 25 A FLS Australian FOOLSCAP 26 OFI OFFICIO 27 E OFI Ecuadorian OFFICIO 28 B OFI Bolivian OFFICIO 29 A LTR Argentine LETTER 30 A LTRR Argentine LETTERR 31 G LTR Government LETTER 32 G LTRR Government LETTERR 33 A LGL Argentine LEGAL 34 G LGL Government LEGAL 35 FOLI FOLIO 36 A OFI Argentine OFFICIO 37 M OFI Mexico OFFICIO 38 39 40 ALL T05 601 0...

Страница 783: ...setting if a transfer fault occurs because of a fault error in the potential sensor Use it as an emergency remedy until the potential sensor is replaced Settings 0 OFF default 1 enables F POT D setting F POT D Use it if a transfer fault occurs because of a fault error in he potential sen sor It is valid only when F POT SW is set to 1 The level of separation current is in the order of 0 1 2 Setting...

Страница 784: ...VICE MODE 5 91 T F HUM D Use it to enter an approximate humidity level of the site of installation Uses the input humidity as the output of the humidity sensor Valid only if F HUM SW is set to 1 Settings 30 to 99 default 35 COPIER OPTION Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 785: ...e mixed size detection mechanism for AB and Inch series originals Settings 0 disable default 1 enable 6 3 SORTER BLNK SW Use it to set the margin width W on both sides of the fold when the saddle stitcher is used Settings 0 normal width 5 mm 1 larger width 10 mm default W F05 603 01 FEEDER OPTION Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 786: ...ation of the RIP1 board Check the generated test print If lines of 32 dots wide are found the board is normal otherwise the board is faulty Using the Mode 1 Select the mode item and press the OK key 2 The machine will generate a test print 3 Check to find out if the generated test print has lines of 32 dots wide PCI1 OFF Use it to turn off the slot 1 function when the board inserted into the PCI s...

Страница 787: ...000 iR6000 REV 0 JULY 2000 CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE 5 94 T 7 TEST test print mode The following screen appears in response to COPIER TEST for the items see the pages that follow PG NETWORK F05 701 01 Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 788: ...een text mode and photo mode during test printing Settings 0 text mode 1 photo mode PG_PICK Use it to select the source of paper for test printing Settings 1 right deck default 2 left deck 3 cassette 3 4 cassette 4 5 to 6 not used 7 paper deck 8 manual feed tray TYPE Input No Test Print Type Input No Type 00 image form CCD normal print 01 grid 02 17 gradations w image correction 03 17 gradations w...

Страница 789: ...ne has properly been installed asking him her to make the appropriate network settings 4 Inform the system administrator that the network connection will be tested and find out the remote host address i e IP address of the PC terminal on the user network for PING 5 Make the following selections in service mode COPIER TEST NETWORK PING then enter the IP address obtained in step 4 and press the OK k...

Страница 790: ...d NIC or the NIC itself may have a problem Go to step 7 to make a check The address will be returned before it reaches the NIC allowing a check on the machine s TCP IP settings 7 Make the following selections in service mode COPIER TEST NETWORK PING then enter the local host address i e the machine s IP address and press the OK key If NG is indicated the NIC connection or the NIC itself is faulty ...

Страница 791: ...at follow TOTAL PICK UP FEEDE PRDC 1 DRBL 1 DRBL 2 PICK UP FEEDER JAM TOTAL MISC F05 801 01 Clearing the Counter Reading 1 Select the item to clear to highlight 2 Press the Clear key on the control panel The counter will be cleared and will return to 00000000 Small Size and Large Size in the Mode large size L larger than A4 or LTR small size S A4 or LTR or smaller Download Free Service Manual at h...

Страница 792: ...lacement the setting may be changed by select ing the image and using the keypad thereafter press the OK key 4 Indicates the ratio of counter readings to limit levels 5 A single exclamation mark will be indicated between 90 and 100 two marks at 100 or higher otherwise no mark 6 Indicates an estimated number of days to replacement in the case of the example 82 days List of Counter Items Level 1 COU...

Страница 793: ...counter C4 cassette 4 jam counter DK paper deck jam counter Level 2 MISC Level 3 FIX WEB fixing web counter Be sure to reset after replacing the fixing web WST TNR waste toner counter Be sure to reset after disposing of the waste toner When FIX WEB counts up to 2000 E005 will be indicated Level 2 PRDC 1 Level 3 PRM WIRE primary charging wire counter PRM GRID primary grid wire counter PO WIRE pre t...

Страница 794: ... 4 separation roller counter C4 FD RL cassette 4 feed roller counter LD PU RL left front deck pickup roller counter LD SP RL left front deck separation roller counter LD FD RL left front deck feed roller counter RD SP RL right front deck separation roller counter RD PU RL right front deck pickup roller counter RD FD RL right front deck feed roller counter M SP RL manual feed separation roller coun...

Страница 795: ... ADF feed roller counter LNT TAPE ADF dust collecting tape counter PD PU RL paper deck pickup roller counter PD SP RL paper deck separation roller counter PD FD RL paper deck feed roller counter FIN STPR finisher stapler counter FIN FDBL finisher feed belt counter FIN PDDL finisher paddol counter SDL STPL saddle staple counter PUNCH punch counter PNCH HRS punch harness counter COPIER COUNTER Downl...

Страница 796: ...COPYRIGHT 2000 CANON INC 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000 iR6000 REV 0 JULY 2000 CHAPTER 6 SELF DIAGNOSIS Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 797: ...Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 798: ...ermal switch TP1 has an open circuit The fixing heater has an open circuit The SSR is faulty The DC controller PCB is faulty Mode of Detection 0000 After the main power switch is turned on the temperature detected by the main thermistor does not reach 70 C Caution The error must be reset in service mode COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR E001 Main Cause The main thermistor TH1 has a short circuit The sub t...

Страница 799: ...ion 0000 The temperature detected by the main thermistor is 70 C for 2 sec or more after it has reached 100 C Caution The error must be reset in service mode COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR E004 Main Cause The SSR has a short circuit The DC controller PCB is faulty Mode of Detection 0000 The SSR used to drive the fixing heater is found to have a short cir cuit hard circuit detection Caution The error mu...

Страница 800: ...y The water toner clock sensor MSW2 is faulty The DC controller PCB is faulty Mode of Detection 0000 The rotation of the waste toner feedscrew goes out of order and the switch MSW2 is pressed multiple times during a specific pe riod of time E014 Main Cause The fixing motor M19 is faulty The DC controller PCB is faulty Mode of Detection 0000 The motor clock signal is detected for 2 secs or more con...

Страница 801: ...ntrol the drum surface potential VL2 of the white background is about 200 V generating solid black im ages 0002 The primary charging output used for print output and the drum surface potential after laser output has been made are about 200 V generating solid black images E100 Main Cause The BD PCB is faulty The laser unit is faulty The laser driver PCB is faulty The wiring is faulty short circuit ...

Страница 802: ...f 100 msec E121 Main Cause The controller cooling fan FM4 is faulty The wiring is faulty short cir cuit open circuit The DC controller PCB is faulty Mode of Detection 0001 Although the controller cooling fan FM4 is being driven the clock signal FM4LCK does not arrive for 5 secs or more E196 Main Cause The EEPROM on the DC controller PCB is faulty The location of the EEPROM is wrong The DC controll...

Страница 803: ... controller PCB is faulty The reader controller PCB is faulty Mode of Detection 0001 During printing the image leading edge signal does not arrive from the ADF Caution No code is indicated and keys are locked The code may be checked in service mode COPIER DISPLAY ERR E220 Main Cause The lamp inverter PCB is faulty The reader controller PCB is faulty Mode of Detection 0001 The lamp inverter PCB is ...

Страница 804: ...M on the reader controller PCB is faulty The reader controller PCB is faulty Mode of Detection 0001 The ID read into the EEPROM when the main power switch has been turned on and the ID in the ROM do not match 0002 When data is written into EEPROM the data written and the data read do not match 0003 When data is written the ID in the EEPROM and the ID in the ROM are found not to match E302 Main Cau...

Страница 805: ...it open circuit The hard disk drive is faulty The main controller PCB is faulty Mode of Detection 0001 A mount error was detected when the hard disk was started up from the boot ROM 0002 A data read error from the hard disk was detected when the hard disk was started from the boot ROM E607 Main Cause The hard disk fan FM7 is faulty The wiring is faulty short circuit open circuit The DC controller ...

Страница 806: ...The finisher controller PCB is faulty Mode of Detection 0001 Data has been written to the error register of the IPC IC5021 on the reader controller PCB four times or more within 1 5 secs 0002 Data has been written to the error register of the IPC IC120 on the DC controller PCB four times or more within 2 secs 0003 Data has been written to the error register of the IPC IC1003 of the main controller...

Страница 807: ...or must be reset in service mode COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR E719 Main Cause The wiring is faulty short circuit open circuit The coin vendor is faulty The main controller PCB is faulty Mode of Detection 0001 The communication between the coin vendor and the main control ler PCB has been interrupted Caution The error must be reset in service mode COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR E732 Main cause The connecto...

Страница 808: ...in Cause The RIP1 board accessory is faulty The main controller PCB is faulty Mode of Detection 0000 An error has been detected by self diagnosis of the RIPI board E743 Main cause The connector has poor contact The main controller PCB is faulty Mode of Detection 0000 The reader controller PCB has detected an error in the communica tion between the main controller PCB and the reader controller PCB ...

Страница 809: ... being driven the clock signal FM3CLK does not arrive for 5 secs or more 0002 While the feed fan is being driven the clock signal FM1CLK does not arrive for 5 secs or more E824 Main Cause The wiring is faulty short circuit open circuit The primary charging as sembly cooling fan FM2 is faulty The DC controller PCB is faulty Mode of Detection 0000 While the primary charging assembly cooling fan is b...

Страница 810: ...c or more E420 Main Cause The EEPROM is faulty The ADF controller PCB is faulty Mode of Detection 0001 When the host machine s power switch is turned on the backup data of the EEPROM cannot be read or the data if read has an er ror E421 Main Cause The EEPROM is faulty The ADF controller PCB is faulty Mode of Detection 0001 Backup data cannot be written to the EEPROM or the data if writ ten has an ...

Страница 811: ...ulty Mode of Detection 0001 Communication between the height sensor and the finisher control ler PCB is not possible or communication data has an error 0002 Communication between the height sensor and the finisher control ler PCB is not possible for a specific period of time 0003 At time of power on the connector of the height sensor is found to be disconnected 0004 When the height sensor is being...

Страница 812: ...ecs 0002 The alignment plate does not return to home position when the alignment motor has been driven for 2 secs E531 Main Cause The stapler home position detecting switch MS7 is faulty The stapler mo tor M6 is faulty The finisher controller PCB is faulty Mode of Detection 0001 The stapler does not leave home position when the stapler motor has been driven for 0 5 sec 0002 The stapler does not re...

Страница 813: ...ray upper limit detecting switch MS5 is faulty The tray lifter motor M5 is faulty The finisher controller PCB is faulty 0001 The ascent does not end in 15 secs when the tray lift motor is driven or the tray home position cannot be detected when the tray lift motor has been driven for 15 secs 0002 While the tray is moving up the tray upper limit detection switch is found to be on 0003 When the tray...

Страница 814: ...e puncher does not return to home position when the punch mo tor has been driven for 200 msecs E593 Main Cause The horizontal registration home position sensor PI1P is faulty The hori zontal registration motor M1P is faulty The punch driver PCB is faulty Mode of Detection 0001 The puncher does not leave home position when the horizontal reg istration motor has been driven for 4 secs 0002 The punch...

Страница 815: ...Cause The folding motor clock sensor PI4S is faulty The paper folding home position sensor PI21S is faulty The folding motor M2S is faulty The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty Mode of Detection 0001 The number of detection pulses of the folding motor clock sensor drops below a specific value 0002 The state of the paper folding home position sensor does not change when the folding motor has...

Страница 816: ...or rear M6S is faulty The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty Mode of Detection 0001 The stitcher home position sensor rear does not turn off when the stitch motor rear has been rotated CW for 0 5 sec or more 0002 The stitch home position sensor rear does not turn on when the stitch motor rear has been rotated CCW for 0 5 sec or more E5F5 Main Cause The stitch home position senor front MS7S i...

Страница 817: ...ion sensor does not turn off when the paper push on plate motor has been driven for 0 3 sec or more 0004 The number of detection pulses of the paper push on plate motor clock sensor drops below a specific value 0005 The paper push on plate leading edge sensor does not turn on when the paper push on plate motor has been driven for 0 3 sec or more E5F8 Main Cause The guide home position sensor PI13S...

Страница 818: ...dition for 1 sec or more from the start of the initial rotation of the host machine or the start of printing 0002 When the inlet cover front cover and delivery cover are found to be closed the front door switch detects an open condition for 1 sec or more after the start of the initial rotation of the host machine or the start of printing 0003 When the inlet cover front cover and delivery cover are...

Страница 819: ...Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 820: ...COPYRIGHT 2000 CANON INC 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000 iR6000 REV 0 JULY 2000 APPENDIX Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 821: ...Download Free Service Manual at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Страница 822: ...eed right motor M18 Duplex paper sensor PS34 Duplex pre registration sensor PS30 Horizontal registration sensor PS31 Reversal flapper solenoid SL 11 Printer unit PSTBY PINTR PRINT LSTR PSTBY Print command received Print command received yyy yyy CCW rotation CW rotation yyy yyy Reader unit ADF STBY Original set sensor PI5 Post separation sensor S3 Registration 1 paper sensor PS1 Read sensor S2 Deli...

Страница 823: ...nal delivery sensor PS35 Eternal delivery sensor PS36 Fixing motor M19 Delivery flapper solenoid SL5 Reversal motor M14 Reversal sensor 2 PS38 Reversal sensor 1 PS37 Fixing web solenoid SL2 Duplex feed left motor M29 Duplex feed right motor M18 Duplex paper sensor PS34 Duplex pre registration sensor PS30 Horizontal registration sensor PS31 Reversal flapper solenoid SL11 ADF STBY Original set senso...

Страница 824: ... C3PLV CASSETTE3 PAPER LEVEL DETECTION signal C3PUSD CASSETTE3 PICK UP SOLENOID DRIVE command C3PWD CASSETTE3 PAPER WIDTH DETECTION C3RTD CASSETTE3 RETRY DETECTION signal C4LMD CASSETTE4 LIFTER MOTOR DRIVE command C4LTP CASSETTE4 LIFTER POSITION DETECTION signal C4OP CASSETTE4 OPEN CLOSED DETECTION signal C4PD CASSETTE4 PAPER DETECTION signal C4PL0 CASSETTE4 LENGTH DETECTION signal C4PL1 CASSETTE4...

Страница 825: ...ING COOLING FAN CLOCK signal FM2ON PRIMARY CHARGING COOLING FAN DRIVE command FM3CLK DERIVERY FAN CLOCK signal FM3ON DELIVERY FAN DRIVE command FM4CLK CONTROLLER COOLING FAN CLOCK signal FM4ON CONTROLLER COOLING FAN DRIVE command FM5CLK DE CURLING FAN CLOCK signal FM5ON DE CURLING FAN DRIVE command FM6CLK DC POWER SUPPLY FAN CLOCK signal FM6ON DC POWER SUPPLY FAN DRIVE command FM7CLK HARD DISK FAN...

Страница 826: ...CT signal LODOP RIGHT LOWER COVER OPEN CLOSED DETECTION signal LSH SAMPLE LASER ACTIVATION signal LWRPD LASER WRITE START DETECTION signal M10ON HOPPER MOTOR TONER SUPPLY DRIVE command M11_A RIGHT DECK PICK UP MOTOR A DRIVE command M11_A RIGHT DECK PICK UP MOTOR A DRIVE command M11_B RIGHT DECK PICK UP MOTOR B DRIVE command M11_B RIGHT DECK PICK UP MOTOR B DRIVE command M12_A CASSETTE3 4 PICK UP M...

Страница 827: ...VE command M24_B LEFT DECK PICK UP MOTOR B DRIVE command M24_B LEFT DECK PICK UP MOTOR B DRIVE command M25_A VERTICALPATHDUPLEXINGFEEDINGMOTOR A DRIVEcommand M25_A VERTICALPATHDUPLEXINGFEEDINGMOTOR A DRIVEcommand M25_B VERTICALPATHDUPLEXINGFEEDINGMOTOR B DRIVEcommand M25_B VERTICALPATHDUPLEXINGFEEDINGMOTOR B DRIVEcommand M26_A VERTICAL PATH UPPER MOTOR A DRIVE command M26_A VERTICAL PATH UPPER MOT...

Страница 828: ...TE signal PR CNT PRIMARY CORONA CURRENT CONTROL signal PR LEAK DETECT PRIMARY CHARGING LEAKAGE DETECTION signal PT SP CNT PRE TRANSFER CHARGING CONTROL signal PT SP LEAK DETECT PRE TRANSFER SEPARATIONCHARGINGLEAKAGEDETECTIONsignal PT SP REMOTE PRE TRANSFER SEPARATIONCHARGINGREMOTEsignal PTRCLM1 PRE TRNANSFERCHARGINGWIRECLEANINGMOTOR1DRIVEcommand PTRCLM2 PRE TRNANSFERCHARGINGWIRECLEANINGMOTOR2DRIVE...

Страница 829: ...IXING MAIN THERMISTOR signal TH2 FIXING SUB THERMISTOR signal THHUM1 MACHINE INSIDE HUMIDITY signal TR CNT TRANSFER CHARGING CURRENT CONTROL signal TR LEAK DETECT TRANSFER CHARGING LEAKAGE DETECTION signal TSCLM1 TRANSFER SEPARATION CHARGINGWIRE CLEANING MOTOR1 DRIVE command TSCLM2 TRANSFER SEPARATION CHARGINGWIRE CLEANING MOTOR2 DRIVE command VP1PD VERTICAL PATH 1 PAPER DETECTION signal VP2PD VER...

Страница 830: ...9003F J9003M J9008 Cassette 4 level detection 15 14 13 12 J809 J809F J809M J8508 PS2 4 4 1 1 2 3 4 5 2 3 1 2 3 2 3 1 Right lower cover open closed sensor C3LMD 0V C4LMD 0V 0V VD2PD_SENSOR 5V 0V VD1PD 5V GND TH GND HUM_OUT 5V 0V C3PLV 5V 0V C4PLV 5V 0V LWRPD 5V 13 14 15 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 5 3 2 1 J114 J123 J124 J201M J201F J101 J102 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ...

Страница 831: ......

Страница 832: ...TXOUTEN RXDATA RXROADN TXDATA TXENDN M CLK CLOCK NC LED100 SW100 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 3 2 1 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 9 10 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 9 10 4 5 6 7 3 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 3 2 1 11 12 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 3 2 1 14 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 3 2 1 4 5 6 7 8 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 4 5 6 3 2 1 J2H PCB2 J2D J2L J4D ...

Страница 833: ... J114 STHPL GND 5V STHPR GND 5V 6 5 4 3 2 1 J103 J203 J204 1 2 3 1 2 3 PS101 PS102 SPCFULL GND 5V SPEXIST GND NC NC 5V 6 7 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 J104 J206 J205F J205H J205 J207 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 S P PS104 PS103 J105 1 2 M SDCM1 SDCM2 Shift motor PCB1 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 GND 5V SPSFULL J208 J106 S P PS105 Limit sensor front Limit sensor rear HP sensor front Tray paper sensor Shift Tray Driver PCB 1 2 3 4 5...

Страница 834: ...ard tools set No 1 2 3 4 5 Name Digital multimeter Door switch Mirror positioning tool front rear NA 3 Test Sheet Potential sensor electrode Toll No FY9 2002 TKN 0093 FY9 3009 FY9 9196 FY9 3012 Shape Rank A A B A B Remarks Used when making electrical checks Used when positioning the No 1 No 2 mirror Used when adjusting checking images Used to make zero level checks on potential sensors ...

Страница 835: ... group of five persons is expected to carry one C each workshop is expected to carry one No 6 7 8 Name Environment sensor checking sensor Tester extension pin Tester extension pin L shaped Toll No FY9 3014 FY9 3038 FY9 3039 Shape Rank B A A Remarks Used to check the environment sensor Used when making electrical checks Used when making electrical checks ...

Страница 836: ...ng photosensitive drum Lubrication scanner rail Lubrication drum heater contact Composition Fluorescent family hydrocarbon alcohol surface activating agent water Fluorescent family hydrocarbon chlorine family hydrocarbon alcohol Mineral family lithium soap molybdenum disulfide Mineral oil paraffin family Silicone oil Cerium oxide Silicone oil Ether polytetra fluoethylene Remarks Do not bring near ...

Страница 837: ......

Страница 838: ...ion Office Imaging Products Quality Assurance Center CANON INC Printed in Japan REVISION 0 JULY 2000 18723 22109 5 1 Hakusan 7 chome Toride shi Ibaraki 302 8501 Japan COPYRIGHT 2000 CANON INC CANON iR5000 iR6000 REV 0 JULY 2000 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON ...

Страница 839: ...PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 0800M1 05 1 This publication is printed on 100 reprocessed paper ...

Отзывы:

Нет отзывов

Похожие инструкции для IR5000 - iR B/W Laser

Lanier LW110 Quick Manual preview
LW110
Бренд: Lanier Страницы: 4
Lanier 5515 Operator'S Manual preview
5515
Бренд: Lanier Страницы: 97
Lanier 5613 Operator'S Manual preview
5613
Бренд: Lanier Страницы: 86
Xerox DocuColor 30 Reference Manual preview
DocuColor 30
Бренд: Xerox Страницы: 13
Canon CLC1000 Service Manual preview
CLC1000
Бренд: Canon Страницы: 627
Xerox Copycentre C118 User Manual preview
Copycentre C118
Бренд: Xerox Страницы: 230
Xerox CopyCentre C32 Color Quick Reference Manual preview
CopyCentre C32 Color
Бренд: Xerox Страницы: 161
Olivetti d-Color MF2613 Plus Service Manual preview
d-Color MF2613 Plus
Бренд: Olivetti Страницы: 375

Бренды по названию

Популярные бренды

Загрузить еще бренды